Everything you might ask about aiKit

aiKit is a workspace for businesses and teams: service businesses, real estate agents, agencies, and print and promo shops. You describe what you need in plain words, and aiKit's AI builds it: a real website you keep changing by asking, plus ready tools that run on that site or on their own, like online booking, quote requests, lead capture, customer proofs, and Printer’s Helper for making, fixing, and resizing print-ready files. When you sign in you land on Home, with a sidebar for Home (what needs you today), My kits (groups of the tools you use together), Projects (your websites), Clients, and the Tool library (every tool, with what it does). For example, the owner of a made-up shop like Maple Street Bakery could start a website, add the Service business starter kit, and take booking and quote requests the same afternoon. To begin, create a free account and follow the three steps on Home.

Yes. Every aiKit tool that takes artwork, such as Logo Kit, Mockup Studio, Gobo Proof Studio, Magic Canvas, and Printer’s Helper, also takes PowerPoint (.pptx, .ppt), Keynote (.key), Word (.docx, .doc), and OpenDocument files. Choose or drop the file the same way as any other, and a window opens where you pick what to use: whole slides (or pages), shown as pictures to pick from, and every picture inside the file at its full original size, each marked with its pixel size and the slide it's on. A slide goes in as a sharp PDF in tools that take PDFs, or as a 300 ppi picture in tools that take pictures only; a picture goes in exactly as it is in the file. Warnings come first, in plain words: a picture too small to print sharply (for example 300 x 300 pixels, or about 75 ppi where it sits on the slide), and fonts the file uses that aren't included in it, which are drawn with a similar stand-in so that text may look a little different. Only Keynote draws Keynote slides, so a Keynote file gives you its pictures, with how to export the slides as a PDF. If whole slides aren't available at that moment, the window says so and still offers the pictures inside. Printer’s Helper also reads PowerPoint and Word files directly as part of the job. For example, a made-up coffee shop's slide deck can give Logo Kit its logo slide and Mockup Studio its photo in two clicks.

Sign in and press New website on Home (or Start a Project in the header, or go to aikit.ai/projects/new). That opens the planner with a chat box ready to type in: say what the business does and what the site must do. Under the box, pick or add the client and choose a Voice (a preset tone, one of your saved Brand Voice profiles, or your own words). More details holds the optional extras: a current web address, brand files, graphics from your Graphics Library, and Pick a look. The planner talks it through one thing at a time by default; Change in the chat bar switches to a few key questions, the detailed form, or sending your client questions first. When the planner has enough, it writes a project plan: pages, tools with the reason for each, brand, search phrases, and open questions. Change anything by chatting, then press Build this project. Basic keeps the questions short; Advanced asks deeper ones. The first build uses the included Standard build; a Premium design build is an optional add-on. For example, a landscaping company can go from a two-minute chat to a plan it can read and approve before anything is built.

It is a free tool at aikit.ai/tools/business-report that gives any business owner a scored report and a site plan in about 30 seconds, with no account needed for the first one. You pick a report (AI, automation, and technology; Website and conversion; or Market and competitors), tell us about the business by typing or talking (only what you most want to build, fix, or improve is required), answer 6 to 8 questions that aiKit's AI writes for your trade, then 3 or 4 deeper follow-ups after a one-line What we're hearing read-back, and add your email. The report has a headline and snapshot, a scorecard that grades four or five areas A to F and quotes the words each grade is based on, 5 findings, 8 modules with one-time or monthly costs (and a Kit ready badge where aiKit already has one), how it all connects, 5 ideas worth stealing, a First 30 days / Next 90 days / Once volume justifies it plan, 3 things to start this month, and your next step. For example, a window-cleaning company might see Path to contact graded D because the site has no form, and a plan with a Get a quote page. See the Free AI Report guide in Help for every screen.

Yes. Every Free AI Report ends with Your site plan: a sitemap tree of the proposed pages, each with why it exists and its sections, plus the modules, the business facts the site should use, a brand direction with two aiKit styles, and the questions still open. Press Build this site free and aiKit starts a real project from that plan, with the pages, the modules (matching kits picked for you), your facts, and your current site's address if you gave one. Building needs a free account; if you are signed out, a sign-up card opens right on the page and the project starts the moment your account exists, so nothing you answered is lost. You land on the new project's page to watch the build, and the report's button changes to Open your project. For example, a dog groomer's plan with Home, Services, Book a visit, and Reviews pages becomes a project with those same pages planned.

Yes. Under the report, Add details or ask a question takes changes in plain words, such as "remove Google Business Profile, add a loyalty punch card" or "drop the social media section". The change is made in the saved report itself, so the report on the page, Copy report, Save as PDF, the share link, and the site plan behind Build this site free all show it. Each reply ends with Changed in your report and every item removed or added, and anything it did not do is said first as Not done yet, with the reason; it never says it changed something it didn't. Only the browser that ran the report or the account that saved it can change it. People opening a shared link can ask questions only.

Yes. Your first report is free with no account. The last step asks for your email (required) and, if you like, your first name, phone, and whether you want a free 15-minute call; these are stored with your report in aiKit only, and the aiKit team is alerted so a person can follow up (first, if you asked for a call). Nothing is emailed to you from this tool and your details are not sent to anyone outside aiKit. A second report, saving a report, or sharing its link needs a free aiKit account; the sign-up card opens in place and your action continues once the account exists. Use Copy report or Save as PDF to keep a copy. Your answers are used to write your report and are stored with it so its link keeps working; a report is only visible to the browser that made it until you press Save and share, which keeps it in your account and makes the link open for anyone you send it to. If you give a website address, aiKit reads that one homepage once, briefly, and treats what it finds as unverified. The report is an AI read of what was available, not a certified benchmark, and it is told never to invent numbers, prices, or software you use.

Click your name and picture at the bottom left of the sidebar and choose Log out. On a phone, tap the round button with your initials at the top right, then Log out. You land on the log in screen and that browser is signed out at once, so pages that need your account ask you to log in again. It signs out only the device you're on. To sign out of every device at once, for example after using a shared or lost computer, open Settings → Sign-in & security and press Sign out everywhere else (setting a new password does the same). On a shared computer you can also untick Remember this device when you sign in, so you're signed out when the browser closes.

You may not need it: on the log in screen, enter your email and press Email me a code, and the 6-digit code signs you in with no password. To set a new password, press Use a password instead, then Forgot password? under the password box. Enter your email and press Email me a code. aiKit emails a 6-digit code and a Set a new password button, both good for 10 minutes and once. Type the code and a new password of at least 8 characters on the same page (your phone or Mac may fill the code in for you), or press the button in the email. You're signed in right away, every other device is signed out, and you get an email saying the password changed. The page answers the same way whether or not an account exists for that email. If the email doesn't arrive in a minute, check spam or promotions and ask for a new code.

Enter your email on the log in screen and press Email me a code. aiKit emails a 6-digit code that works for 10 minutes; type it in, or let your iPhone, Mac or Android phone fill it in from the email. The same email has a Sign me in button for one tap. If the email is new to aiKit, the same steps create your free account. After you're in, you can add a passkey so Face ID, Touch ID or your screen lock signs you in next time, from Settings → Sign-in & security. Continue with Google and Continue with Apple appear on the card once they are switched on.

Yes. When your account signs in on a browser it hasn't used before, aiKit emails New sign-in to your account with the device (for example Safari on iPhone), a rough location, the time, and how it signed in. You also get an email when a password is changed, a passkey is added or removed, Google or Apple sign-in is connected, or other devices are signed out. Each one has a This wasn't me button that takes you to set a new password, which signs every other device out. Settings → Sign-in & security lists every device your account has used and has Sign out everywhere else.

No. An account made with an email code, a passkey, Google or Apple is confirmed already. An account made with a password gets one welcome email with a Confirm my email button, and that link works for 48 hours. Confirming is a good idea, because it lets aiKit reach you about your work (for example, when a customer approves a proof) and makes it easy to get back in if you forget your password. Nothing is locked while your email is unconfirmed. You can log in, start a website, add tools to your kits, and use every tool the same way either way. If the welcome email is missing, look in your spam folder. If the link has expired, nothing breaks: your account keeps working, and you can still reset your password from the log in screen whenever you need to.

No. Everything in aiKit runs on plain words. You describe what you want, and aiKit's AI does the building. To change something, you type or dictate the change ("make the phone number bigger," "add our Saturday hours") and the site is updated for you. In practice that looks like this: on a project page you open the Assistant and ask for a change, or you click a spot on the live preview and describe what should be different there. Tools are added from the Tool library with one click. There's no code editor, no settings file, and nothing to install. If you do work with code, or you built a site in another AI tool, you can bring those files in too. See the Help guide on Connect for that path.

For most of aiKit, yes, and the account is free with no credit card. Your account is what holds your websites, your kits, your clients, and your Printer’s Helper jobs, so the planner at aikit.ai/projects/new and every tool ask you to sign in first. Go to aikit.ai/login and choose Create a free account. There is one exception. The original self-serve wizard, still available at aikit.ai/start/classic, lets you describe a project, answer its questions, and see and refine a complete first draft before you sign up. It asks for a free account when you start a second project, open your project list, or publish to a live link, because a live site needs a real owner. Most people today start from the planner after signing up, since that's where websites, tools, and clients all live together.

Chat mode and Form mode are the two ways to answer questions in the classic self-serve wizard at aikit.ai/start/classic. Chat mode is a conversation: aiKit asks one question at a time, the way you'd describe your business to a person. Form mode shows the same questions as a structured form in three expandable sections, The basics, Vision & audience, and Look & feel, so you can see and jump between every field at once. Form mode also offers more optional depth fields, such as real numbers, what you've already tried, what's driving the project now, and behind-the-scenes needs, plus a notes box per section. Both feed the same project and both can turn on the guided interview. The newer planner at aikit.ai/projects/new works in a similar spirit: it opens on a chat box, talks it through by default, and its Change button switches to a few key questions or a detailed form.

Yes. In the classic wizard, Chat mode and Form mode stay in sync. Anything you've already filled in carries over the moment you switch: your project name, description, audience, main goal, style choices, Form mode's extra depth fields, and each section's notes. For example, you might start in Chat mode because it feels natural, then switch to Form mode to see every field at once and fill in the two you skipped. Nothing is lost either way. The planner used for new projects works the same way in spirit. Change in its chat bar sets how you like to work, and you can tick Make my choices the default so it opens your preferred way next time.

Yes. In the classic wizard's Form mode, each of the three sections (The basics, Vision & audience, and Look & feel) ends with its own optional notes box. Use it for anything that doesn't fit the fields above it: a competitor you want to stand apart from under Vision & audience, or a past design you never want to repeat under Look & feel. These notes go into the first draft with the same weight as your main description, so they're never treated as an afterthought. In the planner for new projects, you can simply say it in the chat, attach brand files, or add it later under Brief & rules on the project. Brief & rules is a living set of notes that aiKit's AI reads before every build and every edit, so a note like "never show prices" is followed from then on.

No. In the classic wizard, Chat mode and Form mode both build the description one paragraph at a time. Type or dictate a paragraph and press Enter or Add. It appears as its own small card you can edit, with a running count of how many things you've added. After each paragraph, a short nudge suggests what's still worth covering, such as a real number, a tool you use today, what made you start now, or something that didn't work before. Press Use this description when you're satisfied. Already have it written somewhere else? Choose Prefer to paste one big block instead, paste it in, and switch back any time without losing anything. Either way, it becomes one description on your project. In the planner for new projects, you can paste a whole brief into the chat the same way.

Very little. The planner needs to know who the project is for and what the site or tool should do for the business. Everything else is optional: who your customers are, pages you want to keep, your logo and colors, whether you already own a web address, and when it needs to be live. More detail gives a sharper first build, so add what you know. For example, "We're a two-person cleaning company in a small town, most jobs come from phone calls, and we want people to request a quote online" gives aiKit plenty to plan from. Where something is missing, aiKit doesn't stop you. It writes clearly marked placeholder content you can replace later and lists open questions on the plan. If you'd rather ask your client first, choose Send the client questions first under More details on the planner (or Change in its chat bar).

It does both. In the classic wizard, for every section of your draft and the large image at the top, aiKit picks a specific photo search made of two concrete, photographable words, such as "bakery storefront" or "electrician panel," never a vague word like "quality" or "trust." That way the photos actually match what each section is about, instead of generic stock images that could belong to any business. For websites built from the planner, the plan includes a photo brief that lists the pictures the site needs. Swapping in your own real photos (your team, your shop, your finished work) is one of the best ways to make the first build feel like your business. Upload them through the Assistant on the project page and ask where they should go.

Open Needs you, right under Home in the signed-in sidebar. It is one list of everything waiting on you across every project and tool: new website requests, change requests to review, client messages to answer, answers to review, unsent questions, builds that need you, and print jobs or proofs that need your answer. Items are grouped by project (with the client's name) or by tool, and each one has a button that opens the exact place to answer it. Chips switch between Needs you, Waiting on others and Everything, and Only this project narrows the list to one project; both stay in the page address so the view can be shared. In the sidebar, Projects lists every project by client with a dot: amber needs you, blue is working or waiting on someone, green has nothing waiting. A star pins a project to the top.

Yes, and there's no limit on how many projects you can have. Once you're signed in, every project lives under Projects in the sidebar, where you can search by project, client, or web address and filter by status or by tool. To add another, press New website on Home or New project on the Projects page. If you build sites for several clients, add each client once under Clients and start new sites from the client's page, so every site is filed in the right place. In the classic wizard at aikit.ai/start/classic, your first project can be made before you have an account. Starting a second one shows a signup card right where you are, without losing what you typed.

Yes. aiKit comes in 28 languages: English, Español, Português (Brasil), Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski, Čeština, Hrvatski, Dansk, Svenska, Ελληνικά, Русский, Türkçe, עברית, العربية, हिन्दी, বাংলা, پنجابی (Shahmukhi), Bahasa Indonesia, Tiếng Việt, ไทย, Kreyòl ayisyen, 简体中文, 繁體中文, 日本語 and 한국어. Hebrew, Arabic and Punjabi read right to left, and the page turns around to match. Public pages also have language addresses, such as aikit.ai/pt/tools for the tool library in Portuguese. The AI tools understand requests written in any language, so you can describe what you want in your own words.

Use the language picker, the globe icon with the name of your current language. On the public site it is in the header at the top (inside the menu on a phone) and in the footer. Inside the app it is in the account menu and in Settings → Language. Every language is written in its own script, so you can find yours even on a page you do not read. Signed in, your choice is saved to your account and follows you to your other devices. Signed out, it is remembered in that browser.

Most of what you read to find your way around is. That includes the public site (home, tools and each tool's page, industry kits, modules and kits), the Help Center and FAQ, and the app's menus, Home, tool library, kits and Settings. The inside of each tool's own screens is still in English for now. The AI tools themselves understand requests written in any language, so you can still work in your own words. Your browser's own translate feature also works on any page.

The translations are made by AI from the English. They are written to be clear and natural, and some wording may differ from what a native writer would pick. When a sentence has no translation yet, aiKit shows it in English, so nothing is ever left blank.

The guided interview is an optional, recommended step in the classic self-serve wizard (aikit.ai/start/classic). Turn on the toggle labeled Interview me for a stronger, more complete plan, and aiKit asks you short rounds of multiple-choice questions shaped around what you've already told it. Each question shows a few tappable answers, plus a Something else choice that opens a text box (with a microphone) when none of them fit. There are up to three rounds, and every round after the first is written from what you actually answered before, not from a fixed list. Should you use it? Usually yes. A first draft built from real answers is more specific than one built from guesses. For example, a dog groomer who answers that most bookings come by text will see a plan that leans into easy online booking. If you already know exactly what you want, skip it and build straight away.

In the classic wizard's guided interview, at most three short rounds, each a small batch of multiple-choice questions. A progress line reads Round X of 3, Question Y of Z, so you always know where you are and how much is left in the current round. Between rounds you'll see a short status line, Reading your answers so far and finding the next real questions, while aiKit prepares the next batch. You never have to finish all three. aiKit itself stops early when it already has enough real detail, and the I'm done, build it now button is available at every point, even mid-round. Pressing it builds your draft right away from everything you've answered so far. A typical person answers one or two rounds and is looking at a draft a few minutes later.

Yes. In the classic wizard the guided interview is opt-in, so you can leave it off and build your draft straight from your description. Even after you start the interview, the I'm done, build it now button is always there, in Chat mode and in Form mode, and it builds immediately from whatever you've answered. aiKit never blocks you from getting a first draft. If something important is missing, the draft fills the gap with clearly marked placeholder content you can replace later, rather than stopping to ask. The planner used for new projects works the same way: choose Answer a few quick questions myself for the four or five that matter most, and the planner writes the plan right after. More detail tends to give a sharper result, but a short start is always allowed.

Yes. In the classic wizard, both Form mode and Chat mode have an optional field labeled Already have a website? Paste your address there and aiKit reads that page, so the questions it asks and the plan it drafts reflect your real business instead of general guesses. That's useful when you're rebuilding an older site or want the new one to stay consistent with what customers already know. In the planner for new projects, paste the client's current site address the same way. The Detailed setup form goes further: Import from a web address lets you use a site as reference only or rebuild it closely and then improve it, and Transfer an existing site moves a working site onto aiKit hosting as it is. For a fresh look at a site you already have, see Copy & improve.

Yes. Add the photo like any clip, then type what you want, for example "make a 10 second ad from this photo with my price and some music". Video Kit keeps the photo on screen, adds a slow zoom, your words, music and a closing card, with no AI video cost. It cannot invent new movement, such as a product spinning. When you ask for that, it says so under Not done yet and shows a Make it move with AI button that opens Scene Studio with your idea. Scene Studio shows the tokens before you press Make.

Under the things aiKit's AI makes for you (website changes and first builds, project plans, Site Plan, Content Kit posts and product descriptions, Writing Pack, Brand Voice samples, Email Studio rewrites, Mockup Studio photo edits, Motion Maker plans, Transcribe & Summarize summaries, Graphics Library suggestions, Quote Studio suggestions, review reply suggestions, Hub summaries, Printer’s Helper, Gobo Proof Studio, and Logo Kit) there's a thumbs up and a thumbs down. Thumbs down asks What went wrong? with choices you can combine (Didn't do what I asked, Changed something I didn't ask for, Something is missing, Wrong text or spelling, Wrong colors, Looks poor or low quality, File, size or bleed problem, Something else) and an optional box for your words. Where the tool can make changes, Send and fix it also asks for a corrected version made from your report; Just send it only reports. Every thumbs down reaches aiKit's team right away and is kept in a test bank that is rechecked after updates, so the same mistake can't quietly come back. You need to be signed in to rate.

Yes. Under the words aiKit's AI writes for you (chat answers, posts, emails, lessons, plans, summaries and more) there's a Read aloud button. It plays with a free device voice, read by your own phone or computer, or with the natural Voice Kit voice, which uses your account's tokens by length; pick either with the small arrow beside the button. Pause, Resume and Stop work while it plays, and only one result reads at a time.

Use the row of buttons under the result. Copy copies it with formatting for Docs, Word or Gmail, and the arrow beside it has Copy plain text. Share makes a read-only link anyone can open without signing in, with Stop sharing to turn it off. Download saves a Word file, and its arrow also offers PDF and plain text. Redo makes a new version where the tool can, and Edit opens the tool's editor, or edits a copy for copying, sharing and downloads. Share isn't offered on private conversations, customer replies, quotes or anything in a client's view.

Yes. Every box where you type a message, a request, notes, or a comment has a microphone button in its corner, so you can speak instead of typing: Printer’s Helper's main box and Ask for a change, proof comments, Send proof notes, Quote Studio, Content Kit and Brand Voice prompts, feedback, and request boxes. Tap it, speak, and tap it again (it shows Listening while it hears you). Short fields like email and phone don't have one. In the classic wizard that covers your project description, audience, goal, Form mode's extra depth fields, each section's notes box, and any Something else answer during the guided interview. The same is true in the planner for new projects and in the Assistant on a project page. For example, you can press the microphone and say "Move the reviews above the services and change the button to Book a visit," then read the words before you send them. Dictation uses your browser's built-in speech feature, so allow microphone access when your browser asks. If the words come out slightly wrong, fix them in the box before you press send. Sending stops the microphone at once: the moment you press Send, Start, Make the change, Apply, or Enter, it stops listening, even while your files are still uploading, and nothing you say after that lands in the next message. The message and its files go out as soon as the uploads finish.

That's fine, and it's common. In the classic wizard every field in Form mode and every interview question is optional or skippable, and aiKit fills the gaps with clearly marked placeholder content instead of stopping you. You can come back later and adjust or replace any section on the Plan tab once you know more. In the planner for new projects, only the core goal is required. Skip anything else, and the plan lists it under open questions so it isn't forgotten. If the answers belong to your client rather than you, choose Save & send the client questions first. aiKit creates the project, takes you to its Questions page to draft and send them a short questionnaire, and the client answers from a link with no account. Their answers land in Brief & rules, and the planner reads them before writing the plan.

It adapts. In the classic wizard's guided interview, the first round is written fresh from what you've already described. It mixes questions about your business goals with concrete questions about what the site should let people do. If you keep going, each later round is written from the actual record of how you answered before, and it digs into whatever came back thin or vague. For example, if you said "we get most work from referrals" but didn't say how, the next round might ask how past customers usually find you again. aiKit also judges when it already has enough real detail and stops asking early, rather than always running all three rounds. Two different businesses that start with the same one-line description will usually see different follow-up questions.

Two kinds, mixed on purpose. Some surface problems or chances you may not have thought about: being reachable after hours, following up with leads before they go cold, or asking happy customers for reviews and referrals. Others are concrete questions about what the site should let people do: create an account and log in, pay online, book a time, browse a catalog, message you directly, or reach a private staff-only area. Every question is grounded in the business you described, not a general template. A landscaping crew and a counseling practice get genuinely different questions, because their customers and their days look different. Each question has a Something else choice, so you're never forced into an answer that doesn't fit. Your answers shape the features suggested in your draft.

Yes, and that's one of its main jobs. Each multiple-choice answer is written to name a real, concrete capability instead of a plain Yes or No. An option might read "Let people book and pay at 2am" or "Remind past customers every season," so simply reading the choices shows you what a website can do for a business like yours, even before you pick one. For example, a small cleaning company might not know a site can ask for photos with a quote request, until it shows up as an option. After the interview, those ideas carry into your draft's Features tab, where you can keep, expand, or remove each one. For a full view of what aiKit can add to a site today, open the Tool library in the signed-in app and look at the Ready now tools.

Yes. Add the Book online page and customers book from real open times in three steps: a service (with its length, price, description and any extras), who they'd like if you have a team, then a day on a month calendar and a time grouped into morning, afternoon and evening, followed by their details and any questions you ask. You set weekly hours with breaks, closed days, how much notice you need, how far ahead people can book, a daily limit, buffers between visits, and classes with a set number of spots in Tools → Bookings, and the page follows your settings right away without a rebuild. Every booking is checked again on aiKit, so two people can never take the same time. For example, a made-up studio like Maple Street Studio could offer 45-minute haircuts with a deep-conditioning extra and a Saturday class of six.

Yes. Every confirmation email has the customer's own booking page with Add to calendar buttons, Change the time (showing only open times) and Cancel. You choose how late changes are allowed, from right up to the visit to 72 hours before, and your cancellation and missed-appointment policy shows before they book and in every email. When someone cancels, the time opens again, you see it in Bookings and on the bell, and anyone on the waitlist for that day gets an email. A reminder email goes out before each visit (2 to 48 hours before, your choice). Emails go out once email is set up for your account.

Yes. In Tools → Bookings → Settings → Your look, add your logo, a wide cover photo, and your main and button colors; each team member and each service can have its own photo too. The booking page and each customer's own booking page use them right away, without a rebuild. Pictures are shrunk before they upload (JPG, PNG or WebP, up to 1.5 MB each), and colors are adjusted where needed so text stays readable. For example, a made-up coffee shop like Harbor Line Coffee could show its storefront, its cup logo, and a photo of its latte art class.

Yes, both, once they're connected. A deposit (a set amount or a share of the price) can be paid by card on the customer's own booking page right after booking, through a secure Authorize.net card form (the card number goes straight to the processor); for now this runs in test mode, so no real money moves. If someone doesn't show, aiKit offers to keep the deposit under your policy or give it back. Text reminders go only to customers who tick "Text me a reminder" when they book, every text says Reply STOP to opt out, and STOP is honored right away. Both need your aiKit admin to switch on card deposits or texting; until then the settings say so and nothing is charged or texted.

One way today. In Tools → Bookings → Share & sync, make your calendar address and subscribe to it in Google Calendar, Apple Calendar or Outlook; every booking shows there and updates about every 15 minutes. Customers also get Add to Google Calendar and an Apple or Outlook calendar file for their own booking. Two-way sync, where appointments you add in Google or Outlook close those times on your booking page, needs you to sign in with Google or Microsoft and is the next step; until then, use Block time in Bookings for your own appointments.

Open the Tool library in the signed-in sidebar to see every aiKit tool and module in one place. Tools are apps you use in your workspace, grouped into kits, like Logo Kit or Printer’s Helper; modules are features you add to a website or app you build, like a quote form or a booking calendar. Each one does one job, shows what it looks like, and the tools that work today show first, marked Ready now. Things that are not built yet are folded into one collapsed section, Ideas we're considering, and labeled Idea, not built yet. You can search everything ("reviews," "invoice"), switch between the Ready now, Ideas, and All tabs (each shows its live count), and filter by Category (Marketing & content; Design, video & audio; Sales, print & operations; Learning, games & wellbeing; Development), and by Industry, inside whichever half is open: two tabs at the top, Tools for your kits and Modules for your sites, keep the two apart (a search looks through both, and each card says Tool or Module). Your search and filters stay in the page address, so a filtered list can be shared and survives a refresh. Ready now is one grid, most-used tools first, each card tagged with its category. Preview opens the real tool, live, with nothing saved or sent. Put any ready tool in a kit in one click. Ideas we're considering is a list grouped by category, with each idea's name and one line on what it might do, See features, and a Notify me button. Ready now today: websites you change by asking and host on aiKit, bringing in a site you built in another AI tool, Site Plan, Printer’s Helper, customer proofs and approvals, and six website tools: quote requests, a contact form that sorts messages by topic, online booking from real open slots, lead capture, Send us your file, and a step-by-step quote builder. The classic Tools page (aikit.ai/tools) lists the same tools with an About panel for each: what it's for, who it's ideal for, what it's not for, and its limits.

A tool is an app you use in your workspace, like Logo Kit, Printer’s Helper, Gobo Proof Studio, Customer Proofs, or the blog and product writer. Tools are grouped into kits. A module is a feature you add to a website or app you build, like a quote form, a booking calendar, a reviews wall, a contact form, or a client portal. Some come as a pair: the booking module on your site, and the Bookings tool where you manage the appointments. A module is yours to change after you add it, by asking for the change in plain words or on its settings page, and each site keeps its own copy, so changing one site never changes another. The Tool library keeps them apart with two tabs at the top, Tools for your kits and Modules for your sites (/catalog?type=modules opens the modules), each card is labeled Tool, Module, or Tool + module, and a card that comes as a pair links to its partner.

A kit is a named group of the aiKit tools you use together, so they sit one click away under My kits in the sidebar. For example, a print shop might keep Printer’s Helper and Customer Proofs in a kit called Print Shop. Press Make a kit to make one, or start from a ready-made kit (Service business, Real estate, Agency, Teaching & training, or Print & promo) and change it any time. One tool can be in several kits, and taking a tool out of a kit never deletes its work. Each kit opens right in the sidebar, so a tool is one click away; drag a tool onto another kit to move it, hold Option (Alt) to copy it, and right-click a tool or kit for more choices. Not sure which tools you need? Answer the optional What kind of work do you do? card at the top of My kits, and aiKit lists the tools that fit your work.

Yes. Every ready tool in the Tool library has a Preview button. Website tools (quote requests, the contact form, lead capture, Send us your file, and the quote builder) open live: the real page your customers would get, filled in with an invented sample business. Booking opens the real Bookings tool as a new account gets it, starting on the booking page customers see, with tabs for the calendar, settings and sharing. You can click through it, fill it in, and send it to see the real thank-you screen, on a desktop or phone size and in five brand palettes. Nothing in a preview is sent, saved, or emailed. Tools that work on their own, like Brand Voice, Content Kit, Customer Proofs, Reviews, Mockup Studio, Logo Kit, Quote Studio, and Printer’s Helper, open the real tool live, on the same empty starting screen you get on a new account, so you can fill in the form and click through it yourself. Logo Kit's preview shows the screens only: a file dropped into it isn't read and never turns into a sample logo. Use Open Logo Kit to clean up your own file in the real tool. Back, at the top left of every preview and every tool's page in the Tool library, returns you to where you were, with your search and filters kept. The Graphics Library opens with example pictures so you can see how it sorts and finds them. In Printer’s Helper's preview you can type a request, use the microphone, add one of the sample files (a postcard and a two-sided business card) or drag it into the box, and press Start: you see the real working steps and the real result our prepress engine made for that sample (bleed added, a new size, a file check, or a two-sided proof), then use a fix from the file check (such as Move everything inside the safe line), Accept as is, Draft a note to the customer, What I did, step by step, Make a proof, the customer picker, and Send proof. No AI runs, nothing is saved, nothing is emailed, and it doesn't use a job. Pro Designer, Magic Canvas, Presentation Builder, Transcribe & Summarize, Video Kit, and Design Contest open on a finished sample instead (a layered flyer, a social post, a 9-slide deck, a meeting transcript with its summary and to-dos, a captioned video, and a finished logo contest), so you can see the result and click around it; asking the AI there gives a labeled sample. Each tool's own Tool library page shows the same preview at the top. Every preview has a bar across its top, Preview — practice copy, nothing is saved, with Open the real tool; if you press something a preview doesn't do, like saving or sending, the bar names it, says nothing was saved or sent, and keeps Open the real tool right there.

It depends on what the app needs to do. aiKit hosts sites made of files that don't need a live server to keep running. That covers a lot: public websites, landing pages, blogs, portfolios, dashboards that show information, and working forms for quotes, contact, bookings, lead sign-ups, and file uploads, whose entries land on the project's Requests tab. When you plan a project you can pick kinds like Website, Landing page, Online store, App, Admin system, Dashboard, Client portal, or Blog. For the more operational kinds, the plan describes real screens, who uses each one, and what's on it, grounded in how you said the work flows. What aiKit doesn't host is a project that needs its own server: user logins checked against a database, payments that complete on a server, or a paid service called with a secret key. Those need their own hosting. The Help guide on Connect lists exactly what works.

They're kinds of project you choose when planning. A Website is a full public site people visit, with pages such as services, about, and contact. A Landing page is one page built around a single offer or campaign, designed to get one action, like a call, a booking, or a sign-up. An Admin system, Dashboard, Client portal, or App is aimed at people working inside a business or customers checking their own status, so the plan describes screens and workflows instead of only marketing pages. You can pick more than one kind for the same project. For example, a moving company might want a Website for new customers and a Dashboard plan for the office team. Keep in mind what aiKit hosts: sites that don't need their own server. Anything needing private logins or payments on a server is planned honestly as work items, not faked.

No. aiKit isn't built around fixed industry templates. You describe your actual business in your own words, and the plan is grounded in that description. It works well for service businesses, local shops, real estate agents, agencies building sites for clients, and print and promo shops, because those businesses benefit most from working forms, booking, quotes, and fast changes. To make the first steps quicker, Home offers starter kits by kind of work: Service business (booking, a quote builder, and a contact form), Real estate (lead capture, booking, and a contact form), Agency (Site Plan, customer proofs, and lead capture), and Print & promo (Printer’s Helper, customer proofs, and quote requests). Each one puts a set of tools in a kit, and you can change them any time. The Tool library also filters tools by type of business.

In the classic wizard, aiKit suggests one of eleven style directions based on what you described: Minimal & Refined, Warm & Personal, Bold & Energetic, Soft & Welcoming, Professional & Trusted, Natural & Grounded, Luxury & Understated, Playful & Fun, Modern & Technical, Fresh & Relaxed, and Creative & Artistic. A style isn't only a color palette. It also changes the voice of the writing. Luxury & Understated is written in calm, restrained language with no exclamation points, while Playful & Fun has more energy. So a whole draft reads as one consistent piece, not a recolored template. For websites built from the planner, you steer the look and words with a Voice (a preset tone, a saved Brand Voice profile, or your own words), your logo, brand files, and Graphics Library picks, and optionally Pick a look, which grounds the build in up to six sites from your approved reference library.

Yes. In the classic wizard, the Live Preview tab has a See another direction button that cycles your draft through aiKit's other style directions, so you can compare quickly. If you'd rather choose deliberately, the full style gallery is always available to browse and pick one. For websites built from the planner, the look changes through the Assistant. Ask for a specific change in plain words ("warmer colors, bigger photos, a friendlier font"), or, when the whole look should change, use Redesign this site on the Assistant's Pins tab. It drafts a written art direction from reference sites that fit the project (a named palette, a type pairing, and signature sections), lets you edit it, and then changes every page. Every change is saved as a version you can undo.

aiKit writes real, specific copy based on what you told it: your services, your area, your customers, and how you work. It isn't filler text from a template. Sometimes it has to fill a gap you haven't covered yet. A customer review is the clearest case, since a new business has none on day one. In the classic wizard, that section gets a visible Sample flag so it's clear what's placeholder and what's real, and the flag goes away once you replace it with the genuine thing. For websites built from the planner, aiKit's AI follows the project's Brief & rules on every build and edit, and never invents phone numbers or emails for forms. A good habit after any first build is to read each page and swap in real facts, photos, and reviews.

It's a mix, and it's worth knowing which parts are which. In the classic wizard, for Internal Tool, Admin System, Client Portal, or App projects, aiKit drafts a detailed plan for each screen: its name, who uses it, and real field names, columns, statuses, and buttons. Table and record-detail screens are backed by real storage: add, edit, or delete a record, reload the page, and it's still there. Boards, dashboards, calendars, and activity feeds are display-only previews. On websites built from the planner and hosted on aiKit, the working parts are the tools: quote requests, contact, booking, lead capture, file upload, and the quote builder all save real entries to the project's Requests tab. What aiKit doesn't build is a full custom application with its own login system for your customers. That kind of project needs its own server.

It works from what you actually told it, not from a fixed industry template. Every plan is grounded in your description, your answers to the planner's or interview's questions, and, if you shared one, a read of your existing website. On websites built from the planner, aiKit's AI also reads the project's Brief & rules before every build and every edit: business facts, brand, rules, content guidelines, decisions, and notes. So when you add "we never quote prices online" or "always call it a studio, not a salon," that's followed on every later change. It's also told not to invent facts you didn't give it. When something important is missing, it leaves a clear placeholder or lists it as an open question. For example, two bakeries with the same style still read differently, because each told aiKit something different.

Yes. When a customer sends a file through your aiKit website's Send us your file page, each print file (PDF, AI saved with PDF content, EPS, PNG, JPG, TIFF or PSD) is checked automatically as it arrives, after the customer already has their confirmation, so they never wait. The result shows only to you and your team, on the request in the project's Requests tab: Looks print-ready, Worth a look, or Must fix, with plain lines for the finished size, bleed, resolution, fonts and colors (for example "A photo is only 96 ppi at its printed size" or "1/8 in bleed past the trim on every side"). Your customer never sees it. The check measures the file with code, uses no AI and costs nothing. Fix it in Printer’s Helper opens Printer’s Helper with that file already added; nothing runs and no job is used until you press Start. SVG files are not checked, and files can be up to 4 MB together.

That depends on whether the tool is marked Ready now or listed as an idea (not built yet). A Ready now website tool is real, tested code. Add quote requests, the contact form, online booking, lead capture, Send us your file, or the quote builder, and your site gets a working page whose entries land on the project's Requests tab. Press Check it works on the tool's card to send one marked test entry through the real form. An idea that is not built yet can still be added to a project's plan from the Kit. It's recorded on the brief and filed as a work item, and the AI can build a version into your site's own pages the same way it makes any other change. It just doesn't have a tested, ready-made template behind it yet. In the Kit Explorer, the badge on each item tells you which kind you're looking at before you add anything.

Yes. Service and trade businesses are some of the best fits for aiKit. Describe your crew, your service area, and how jobs come in today, and the planner writes a plan around that: service pages, a photo gallery of finished work, local search phrases, and the tools that turn visitors into jobs. The Service business starter kit on Home adds three ready tools in one click: online booking from your real hours, a step-by-step quote builder, and a contact form that sorts messages by topic. Each one becomes a working page on your site, and every request lands on the project's Requests tab with the person's details and a status you move from New to Contacted, Won, or Closed. Quote requests can include photos from the customer's phone. For example, a made-up company like Willow Bend Lawn Care could be taking quote requests from its own site the same week. Start with New website on Home.

Yes. Describe your food business, your menu style, hours, location, and what makes you different, and aiKit plans and builds a site grounded in that. There's no fixed restaurant template, so a food truck and a sit-down cafe get different sites. Useful ready tools include the contact form (for catering questions or large orders), lead capture (to build an email list with a first-visit offer, with consent recorded), and online booking for set-length appointments like tastings or consultations. In the Tool library, filter by Food & restaurants to see what fits. Two honest limits: aiKit doesn't run online ordering or a point-of-sale system, and online booking is for appointments with set lengths, not table reservations with many seats. If you already use an ordering service, the site can link to it. Open the Tool library to look around.

aiKit can plan one and build the parts that work as a hosted site, and it's worth knowing where the line is. Pick Client portal when planning a project, and the plan describes real portal screens grounded in how you manage clients: a status view for each client, a place for shared files, and your own view across all clients. What aiKit hosts are sites that don't need their own server, so a true private portal where each client logs in and sees only their own records needs separate hosting. What aiKit does give you today: a professional public site, a contact form that routes each message by topic, online booking for consultations, and lead capture. aiKit also has client-facing tools of its own for agencies and firms that build sites: a private Recent updates page, a site plan the client can approve page by page, and a questionnaire link. See the Help guide on Clients.

Yes. Describe your practice: your services, who your clients are, and how people book or reach you today. aiKit plans and builds a site grounded in that, with no fixed template limiting it. Online booking is often the most useful tool here. Visitors see real open slots based on your hours, slot length, and notice period, shown in your business's time zone with their own local time alongside. Each booking blocks its whole length plus any buffer you keep between appointments, so nothing overlaps, double-bookings are refused, and each booking lands on the project's Requests tab. Pair it with the contact form and lead capture for a new-client offer. In the Tool library, filter by Salons & spas to see what fits. Bookings also show on a day, week and month calendar in Tools → Bookings, and a calendar address puts them in Google, Apple or Outlook. Deposits can be paid by card on the customer's booking page (Authorize.net, test mode for now) or however you tell customers, and visits marked Completed can trigger your review ask. One limit to know: your own Google or Outlook appointments don't close booking times automatically yet (use Block time). For health-related businesses, keep medical details off public forms and ask for only what you need to book.

aiKit can plan one in detail and give you real working pieces, and it helps to know which is which. Choose Admin system or Dashboard when planning, describe how jobs move through your business today, and the plan describes the screens: a job board with customer, address, assigned crew, and status, split by who uses it, such as the office versus the field crew. The parts that work today live on your website: quote requests (with photos from the customer's phone), online booking for service visits, and a contact form that routes messages by topic. Every request lands on the project's Requests tab with a status you move from New to Contacted, Won, or Closed, and a private note for your team. A full dispatch system with crew logins and a live job database needs its own server, so aiKit plans it honestly rather than faking it.

It works for product businesses too. Describe what you sell and who buys it, and aiKit plans and builds product-focused pages, a catalog-style layout, and copy suited to selling physical goods. For shops that sell made-to-order or quantity-based products, the quote builder is a good fit: customers pick a product, quantity, options, and turnaround in four short steps, and the request arrives complete on the project's Requests tab. It shows an estimated price range only if you enter your prices, and you confirm the final price yourself. One honest limit: aiKit hosts sites that don't need their own server, so it doesn't run a shopping cart that takes payments on its own. If you already sell through an online store service, your aiKit site can link to it. Online store is one of the project kinds you can plan, so the plan will spell out what's needed.

Yes. Describe your organization, your mission, and how members, volunteers, or attendees interact with you, and aiKit plans and builds a site grounded in that description. There's no special nonprofit template; the same planner that works for any business works here. Helpful ready tools include lead capture for a newsletter or volunteer list (with consent recorded), a contact form that sorts messages by topic, such as volunteering, donations, or events, and online booking for meetings or set-length appointments. Each submission lands on the project's Requests tab. If you also want an internal way to track members or events, choose Admin system or Dashboard when planning, and the plan will describe those screens. Keep in mind that private member logins need separate hosting. Start with New website on Home.

Yes. Describe what you teach or coach, who it's for, and how people sign up today, and aiKit plans and builds a site around that, written in a voice that fits you. The most useful ready tools here are online booking (people pick a real open slot for a session or a free intro call), lead capture (offer a free guide or checklist and collect sign-ups with consent recorded), and the contact form. Everything people send lands on the project's Requests tab. A course platform with student logins, video lessons behind a paywall, or payments taken on the site needs its own server, so aiKit doesn't host that part. Many coaches link their site to the course service they already use. For a separate kind of help, Goal Kit (aikit.ai/tools/goals) builds a dated plan with milestones, weekly steps and a coach for your own goals.

Yes. A Website or Landing page is a natural fit for a portfolio, and this is where the look really matters. In the planner, set a Voice (a preset tone, a saved Brand Voice profile, or your own words), attach your logo and best work (from your computer or your Graphics Library), and use Pick a look to ground the build in up to six sites you admire from your approved reference library. Once the site exists, ask for changes in plain words, such as "bigger images, less text, a dark background," or click a spot on the live preview to change exactly that. When you want a completely different feel, Redesign this site writes an art direction with a named palette, a type pairing, and signature sections, and you approve it before it runs. Useful ready tools: the contact form, online booking for sessions or consultations, and Send us your file for clients who need to share reference images.

Yes. A project in aiKit can hold several parts, one per product. Say a bakery needs a website and an online store: build the website, then on its Overview tab press Add a part and pick Online store. The planner opens with the client and the website already filled in and plans only the store. The store is built and hosted on its own, with its own address, versions, requests, and status, and both show together on the Parts of this project card, on the website's page and on the store's. They share the client and the client's Brief & rules, so the brand and answers carry over. Only the main project's owner, its builders, or an aiKit admin can add a part. A project saved earlier with several kinds ticked shows the extra kinds as planned parts, each with Plan this part.

It's the setting on a project's Settings tab called When a client submits a request, and it decides who acts first when your client pins a change on their site. With Straight to work, the default, aiKit's AI starts on the request the moment your client sends it, your client sees it marked Working on it, and nobody on your team approves it first. With I review first, the request waits on the Feedback tab as Open, your client sees a note that the team reviews each request first, and nothing changes until an owner or builder presses Approve to work, which is what starts the AI. Either way, on a live site the finished change waits as a draft until an owner or builder presses Publish, unless How changes go live is set to Publish automatically. So Straight to work saves you a step, and I review first lets you filter requests before any work happens. A Reviewer's notes always wait for the team.

Yes. In aiKit each product is a part of one client project: build the public website first, then open its Overview tab and use Add a part to add an Admin system, a Dashboard, or a Client portal next to it. Each part gets its own plan, build, address, and status, and they all show together on the Parts of this project card, sharing the client and the client's Brief & rules. The planner plans only the new part, so the website isn't re-planned. The public site and its working tools are built and hosted right away: quote requests, bookings, contact messages, and lead sign-ups land on the project's Requests tab, which works like a simple shared inbox with statuses and private notes. The internal software part is planned in detail, and anything that needs its own server, such as staff logins tied to a database, is listed as a work item instead of being faked. Team members can be added as Builders or Reviewers on each part.

Yes. aiKit works from a short description; you don't need an existing site, photos, or reviews. Tell the planner what you're starting, who it's for, and what the site should do, and it writes a plan you can read before anything is built. Where there's a real gap, such as no customer reviews yet, aiKit fills it with clearly marked placeholder content and lists open questions on the plan, rather than inventing facts. As your business grows, replace placeholders with real photos, reviews, and details by asking the Assistant. A practical starting setup: a simple website, lead capture to start an email list from day one (with consent recorded), and a contact form or online booking so the first customers can reach you. The free hosting period gives you time to get going before you need a paid plan.

Yes. The Real estate starter kit on Home adds three ready tools to a kit in one click: lead capture for buyer and seller sign-ups, online booking for showings and consultations, and a contact form that sorts each message by topic. Here's how it looks in practice. Start a website from Home and describe your market, the neighborhoods you serve, and what makes you different. aiKit plans and builds the site, and the tools become working pages on it. Every sign-up, showing request, or question lands on the project's Requests tab with the person's details and a status, and lead sign-ups are tagged so you can see them at a glance. Two limits to know: aiKit doesn't pull live property listings from a listing service, and booking sends appointments to Google, Apple or Outlook through a calendar address, but your own calendar's appointments don't close booking times automatically yet. Open the Tool library to look at each tool before you add it.

A general chat assistant hands you a wall of text that you still have to organize, design, and put online yourself. aiKit takes you all the way to a working site. Here's what happens instead. The planner asks focused questions about your business and writes a plan you can read and change. aiKit's AI then builds real pages, and the build is checked rather than trusted: every tool you picked is looked for in the actual files and flagged if it's missing. Forms for quotes, contact, booking, lead sign-ups, and file uploads actually work, and entries land on your Requests tab. The site is hosted at a real address, every change becomes a version you can undo (aiKit keeps the Original and your newest 10 versions), and the AI reads your Brief & rules before each change. For example, "change our hours on every page" is one sentence in the Assistant, not an afternoon of copying and pasting.

aiKit uses top-tier AI models chosen for each job, and it spends the most care on the moments that matter most. A first build gets the most capable treatment. When you build from the planner, the included Standard build is used, and a Premium design build is offered as an optional add-on for the first build only. In the classic wizard, your first draft is written three separate times and a separate pass compares them and keeps the strongest one, so you only see the winner. Later changes use faster settings, because a targeted edit ("move the reviews up," "fix the phone number") needs to come back quickly, not take as long as a full first build. Throughout this site we simply call it aiKit's AI. It always follows your project's Brief & rules and is told not to invent facts about your business.

Because they're different kinds of work. A first build creates a whole site: every page, its structure, its copy, and each tool you picked. Afterward aiKit checks that each picked tool really made it into the files, asks the AI once more for anything missing, and writes a plan describing what was built. For a new project that usually takes a few minutes, and the project page shows a live clock and progress while you wait. It's safe to leave and come back. Later edits are targeted. "Change the button to Book a visit" only needs the AI to find that spot, change it, and save a version, so most small changes land in under a minute. In the classic wizard the same idea applies: the first draft is written three ways and judged, while revisions use a faster setup.

Sample is aiKit's honesty flag in the classic wizard. It marks content aiKit had to invent because you haven't provided the real version yet. The most common case is a customer review, since a new project has no genuine customer quote on day one. Rather than passing off invented content as real, aiKit puts a visible Sample label on that section. The text itself reads normally, so a visitor isn't confused by broken-looking placeholder words, but you can see at a glance what still needs replacing. The flag clears automatically once you replace the section with your own content, for example by pasting in a real review from a customer email. Before you publish, scan your draft for any remaining Sample flags so nothing invented goes live.

There are a few ways, depending on how big the change is. On a project page, press Open the editor and ask in plain words: "Make the phone number bigger and add our Saturday hours." Or open the Edit tab, click Pin a spot on the live preview, click the exact element, and describe what should be different there. For an area rather than one spot, press Draw and drag a line across it. While the AI works you see each step: reading a file, updating a file, publishing. If the project is live, the change goes live and the preview reloads. Every change is saved as a version you can restore (aiKit keeps the Original and your newest 10 versions). In the classic wizard, each section on the Plan tab has its own Adjust or remove this section control, the Features tab lets you keep or remove ideas, and Make it yours opens a revision chat for bigger changes.

This applies to the classic wizard's first draft. aiKit writes three full, independent drafts at the same time, each with a different approach to how the page opens and flows: one leads with trust and credibility, one leads with how your service works, and one leads with the specific problem you solve. A separate AI pass then compares all three and keeps the strongest. That winner is the draft you see, so you're never asked to judge three long drafts yourself. If the result isn't quite right, you don't need to start over. Adjust single sections, keep or remove features, or switch to another style direction from the Live Preview tab. Websites built from the planner work differently: they're built once from the approved plan and then improved through the Assistant.

In the classic wizard, it rewrites the voice too, not just the colors. Each of the eleven style directions carries its own writing instructions. Luxury & Understated uses calm, restrained language with no exclamation points; Playful & Fun has more energy and personality; Professional & Trusted is plain and credible, with no hype. That voice shapes sentence length and word choice across the draft, so switching styles changes how your site reads as well as how it looks. For example, the same bakery might read "Small-batch loaves, baked before sunrise" in one style and "Fresh bread, every single morning!" in another. For websites built from the planner, the brand tone you set and your Brief & rules play the same role, and you can change the voice at any time by asking the Assistant.

You have several ways to fix it without starting over. In the classic wizard, use Adjust or remove this section for one part, the Features tab to keep or remove ideas, Make it yours for a bigger rewrite in chat, or See another direction to cycle the whole draft through a different style and voice. For websites built from the planner, the first build is a starting point, and the project page says so. Improve it by asking the Assistant, pinning exact spots, swapping in your real photos, and filling in Brief & rules so the AI knows the business. If the whole look is wrong, Redesign this site writes a new art direction for you to approve and then changes every page. Every change is a version, so you can go back to the Original or to any of your newest 10 versions. Nothing requires rebuilding from scratch.

Yes. aiKit's AI is told not to make up legal or compliance wording, license or certification numbers, or real prices shown to customers. When a request would need one of those, it leaves that value clearly blank, or makes the rest of the change and leaves out just the risky part, and tells you in plain words what it didn't guess and what you need to confirm. For example, if you ask for "a warranty section with our contractor license number," it will write the section and ask you for the actual number rather than inventing one. The same care shows up in the tools: quote and contact pages never get an invented phone number or email, and the quote builder only shows a price range when you enter your own prices. If you add a rule like "never show prices" to Brief & rules, it's followed on every later change.

Those are do-it-yourself builders. You pick a template, arrange blocks, write your own words, and make every layout decision inside their editor. aiKit starts from a conversation instead: describe the business, approve a plan, and aiKit's AI builds the pages and writes the copy for you. Changes work the same way. Instead of dragging blocks, you ask: "Add a section about our warranty," or click a spot on the live preview and say what should change. Every change is saved as a version you can undo. aiKit also comes with working tools built for running a business, such as quote requests, online booking, lead capture, and file uploads, with every entry landing on one Requests tab. If you build sites for clients, Clients, Site Plan, and page-by-page client approval are built in too. To compare for yourself, start a website from Home and read the plan before anything is built.

For most business websites, no. aiKit plans the site, writes the copy, builds the pages, hosts them at a real address, and keeps changing them whenever you ask in plain words. Working tools like quote requests, online booking, and a contact form are added from the Tool library without any setup. Where a professional still helps: a fully custom brand identity, a site that needs its own server (private customer logins, payments on the site, or a database of records), or complex connections to other software. aiKit is honest about those limits and lists anything it doesn't host as work items on the plan instead of faking it. Many agencies and freelancers use aiKit themselves to build and manage client sites faster. If that's you, see the Help guide on Clients for running many client sites in one place.

A template is the same layout and placeholder text for every buyer. You still replace every word, choose every photo, and set it up somewhere to go live. aiKit starts from your business instead: it writes real copy based on what you described, plans the pages you actually need, and builds and hosts the site. The look is yours to steer. Set a brand tone, attach your logo and brand files, and optionally point aiKit at sites you like from your approved reference library. Later, ask for any change in plain words, or use Redesign this site for a completely new art direction with a named palette and type pairing. And unlike a template, an aiKit site comes with working tools, such as booking, quote requests, and lead capture, whose entries land on your Requests tab.

A no-code builder gives you parts and logic that you assemble yourself. You're still the builder, and you have to learn the tool first. aiKit asks about your business first, then writes a plan and builds the site for you. You react and refine instead of starting from an empty canvas. Its scope is also different. aiKit focuses on what businesses need most: a good website, working forms for quotes, contact, booking, lead sign-ups, and file uploads, hosting, and fast changes by asking. For more operational projects it writes a detailed screen-by-screen plan, but it doesn't host projects that need their own server, like private logins backed by a database. Those are listed as work items rather than faked. If you need a working website this week, aiKit is the faster path.

You can, but you'd be doing by hand everything aiKit does for you. A chat tool gives you text. You'd still need to split it into pages, write headings and menu labels, find photos, design the layout, set up working forms, and host it somewhere. With aiKit, the planner turns your description into a plan you approve, the build creates real pages and checks that every tool you picked actually made it in, and the site goes live at a real address. Forms for quotes, contact, and booking send entries straight to your Requests tab. After that, changes are one sentence away. Ask the Assistant to "update our hours on every page," and it finds every spot, makes the edit, publishes it, and saves a version you can undo. A chat window doesn't keep your site up to date.

For many businesses, it covers what they'd hire a freelancer for: turning a rough idea into a real plan, writing the copy, building the pages, getting the site live, and making changes afterward. With aiKit those changes happen when you ask, not when someone has time. A designer still adds value for a fully custom brand, unusual layouts, or projects that need their own server, such as private customer logins or payments on the site. aiKit says plainly when something is outside what it hosts. Plenty of freelancers and agencies use aiKit to work faster. The Agency starter kit adds Site Plan, customer proofs, and lead capture to a kit, and Clients keeps every client's sites, requests, and approvals in one place. Open Home and pick the starter kit that matches your work.

A bit of both. The planner behaves like a knowledgeable partner. It asks about your business the way a good consultant would, suggests ideas you can add with one click, and writes a plan with pages, tools, the reason for each tool, search phrases, and open questions. You can read and change the plan before anything is built. Then it does the work a builder would. aiKit's AI builds the site, adds working tools, hosts it, and keeps improving it when you ask. Next steps on each project page reads the project's real state and suggests what to do now, soon, and later, such as sending client questions, going live, or adding a tool, each with a button that takes you there. None of it is required; you stay in charge of every decision.

You can get real work done on aiKit without paying anything or entering a credit card. Creating an account is free. You can plan a website, build it, put it live at a real address, and use the ready tools on it. Every account also gets a monthly amount of tokens for aiKit's AI tools, Printer’s Helper included. Here's how the free parts fit together. Every published site starts with a 90-day free hosting period and carries a small Built with aiKit ∞ badge. Paid yearly hosting after that period is coming soon; until it arrives, published sites simply stay live. AI edits on websites built from the planner come with a free allowance per client (10 edits, released at most 3 a day), and questions to the Assistant never use one. When you need more, press Ask for more tokens, and aiKit adds them. You're never billed by surprise. Paid plans are optional and run from $18.88 (Starter) to $348.88 (Agency) a month; Settings → Billing shows the price and the charge date before anything is paid.

Every published site gets a 90-day free hosting period. After that, continued hosting moves to a paid yearly plan, which is coming soon. Until paid hosting is switched on, nothing happens at day 90: your site stays live, at the same address, with no takedown and no paywall. You can see where a project stands on its page. Under Technical details, the free preview end date is shown (90 days from when the project was created). When paid hosting does arrive, it will be clearly explained ahead of time, with the price shown before you choose anything, and no card is ever charged without you entering one and agreeing. In the meantime, use the free period to finish your site, connect your own domain if you have one, and start collecting requests through your site's forms.

It depends on where the site was made. For websites built from the planner and managed under Projects, AI edits are counted. Every edit uses your account's tokens. Changes a client asks for from their own link also stop at that client's monthly token amount (2,000 to start), which you can change on the client's page. An AI edit is a change the Assistant actually makes to the site; asking it a question is free. The chip in the Assistant's header shows the account's real tokens left today (or this month), the same check every edit goes through, so it never says edits are left while the account's limit is reached; hover it to see this project's edit count too. When the account's tokens for the day are used, the chip reads tokens used up for today and a card in the chat says so until they renew. When they run out, the Assistant says so and offers Ask for more tokens, which sends a request to the aiKit team. Edits are added by aiKit, never billed by surprise. In the classic self-serve wizard, revisions run in Fast Mode, labeled included free and unlimited while you build, with no edit counter.

Yes. Every account has one monthly token allowance set by its plan, and it covers all of the account's AI use: building and editing its websites, the planner, Content Kit, Graphics Library suggestions, Mockup Studio photo edits, review replies, Logo Kit changes, Quote Studio and Hub helpers, and the business report. On the Free plan, Printer’s Helper counts too; on paid plans it's counted by its monthly jobs instead. A Free account has 300 tokens a month, and up to 150 of them can be used in one day, so you can really try a tool in one sitting; paid plans have more. Some accounts get a custom amount from the aiKit team. Your first website build is free and uses no tokens, once per account. The Free plan includes that one website; to build another, upgrade to a paid plan (for now, ask the aiKit team). Accounts that existed when the caps started get a 30-day welcome period with 1,200 tokens a month and 225 a day. Before a run starts, aiKit checks what that kind of run usually takes; if it's more than what is left, it doesn't start, and the message says how many tokens it needs, how many are left, and when they come back: the daily ones within 24 hours, the monthly ones on your account's monthly renewal day. Settings → Tokens & usage shows your tokens used and left, and how to get more. Going over a cap never adds a charge. To keep going sooner, choose a bigger plan on Settings → Billing, which shows the price and charge date before you pay. While card payments aren't switched on, that screen says so and the aiKit team sets plans on request.

No. You don't need a credit card to create an account, plan and build a website, publish it to a live address, add ready tools from the Tool library, or use your account's monthly tokens in AI tools like Printer’s Helper. Creating a free account is the only step. Go to aikit.ai/login, choose Create a free account, and you land on Home with three first steps: start a website, add tools for your kind of work, and look around the Tool library. If you run out of something included, such as AI edits on a website or your tokens for the month, you ask for more from inside the tool or on Tokens & usage, and the request goes to the aiKit team. There's no charge for that. Paid plans are optional: if you choose one on Settings → Billing, the screen shows the price and the monthly charge date before you enter a card.

It's a small badge and link at the bottom of every free-tier published site. It reads Built with aiKit ∞ and links back to aiKit. The badge is part of how free hosting works: in exchange for a real live address and hosting at no cost during the free period, the site carries a small token, much like many free website services do. It sits quietly at the bottom of the page and doesn't change your design, your content, or how your forms work. Visitors who click it simply land on aiKit's website. Your Requests tab, your customers' details, and your site's content aren't affected by it.

Not at the moment. Every free-tier published site carries the Built with aiKit ∞ badge, and a paid, badge-free option is coming soon. When it arrives, it will be explained clearly with its price shown before you choose it. In the meantime, the badge is small, sits at the very bottom of the page, and doesn't affect your design, your words, or your working forms. If you build sites for clients, it's worth mentioning the badge up front so it isn't a surprise. You can add it to the client's Brief & rules under Decisions so everyone on the project knows it was discussed.

Some things are free by design, and website hosting has a free period. Free by design: creating an account, planning projects, Tool library, and a monthly amount of tokens for AI tools like Printer’s Helper (it renews on your account's renewal day). Free for a period: hosting a published site, which comes with a 90-day free hosting period. Paid yearly hosting after that is coming soon. Until it's switched on, published sites stay live with no cutoff. AI edits on websites built from the planner come with a free allowance per client, and more are added on request. So the honest answer is that aiKit isn't promising free hosting forever. It's promising that you'll see value first, that nothing is charged by surprise, and that prices will be shown clearly before you pick a paid option.

There's no hidden catch, and the trade-offs are visible. First, every free-tier published site carries a small Built with aiKit ∞ badge at the bottom that links back to aiKit. That's part of how free hosting is funded. Second, the free hosting period lasts 90 days, after which continued hosting moves to a paid yearly plan, which is coming soon. AI work costs real money to run, which is why AI edits on websites come with a free allowance rather than unlimited use, and why AI tools like Printer’s Helper run on a monthly amount of tokens. What aiKit doesn't do: bill by surprise. A card is charged only for a plan or storage add-on you choose on Settings → Billing, with the price and charge date shown first, and going over a limit never adds a charge.

No. Going live is free. On a project built from the planner, press Go live on the project's page and the site goes live right away at a temporary aiKit address. You can connect your own domain later from the project's Hosting tab whenever you're ready. There's no plan to pick and no card to enter at that moment. Every published site starts with a 90-day free hosting period and carries the small Built with aiKit ∞ badge. Paid yearly hosting after that period is coming soon; until then, sites simply stay live. In the classic self-serve wizard, publishing works the same way: create a free account, confirm publishing, and the project goes live immediately. Before going live, read through each page, replace any placeholder content, and press Check it works on each form so you know entries arrive.

Open Settings → Billing (aikit.ai/home/billing) and pick a plan: Starter $18.88, Pro $48.88, Team $88.88, Business $198.88 or Agency $348.88 a month, each with its team seats, client seats, projects and storage listed on the card. Before you enter a card, the screen says exactly what happens, for example "You'll be charged $48.88 today and every month on the 4th until you cancel." Adding a card needs a confirmed email; if yours isn't confirmed yet, the screen offers Send the confirmation email first. Enter the card number, expiration, security code and billing ZIP, then press Pay and start. The card goes straight to the payment processor over a secure connection; aiKit's servers never see or store the number. The first month is charged right away, your new limits start at once, and a receipt is emailed. If card payments aren't switched on yet, the Billing screen says so, nothing is charged, and the aiKit team sets plans on request from Hub → Settings → Plan & storage.

On Settings → Billing, pick a different plan under Change plan. The screen shows the server's numbers before you confirm. Moving up starts right away: you pay the difference for the rest of the current month (for example, halfway through a month, going from $48.88 to $88.88 charges $30.00 today), then the new price every month on your usual day. If the difference is under 50 cents, nothing is charged today. Moving down charges nothing today: you keep what you already paid for until the month ends, then the smaller plan and its price start. Your Plan card shows the scheduled change, and Stay on the current plan undoes it. If you're over a limit of the smaller plan when it starts, nothing is deleted; new uploads or invites pause until you make room. Accounts on a complimentary or aiKit team plan are set by the aiKit team and have nothing to pay.

Tokens are how aiKit counts AI work. Every AI tool (website builds and edits, Photo Studio, Scene Studio, Video Maker, Writing, Lessons, Decks, Music Maker, Content Kit and more) uses the same monthly balance, and each tool shows its token cost before you start. A failed AI result is never charged: if a generation fails in any tool, it isn't counted, or the tokens it held are given back automatically. Hosting, storage and everyday clicks never use tokens. Your balance shows in the top bar, and Settings → Tokens & usage shows what's left, the renew date and how to get more. Tokens renew once a month on your own day: the day your paid plan renews, or the day you signed up on Free; unused ones don't carry over. If you run out, ask for an extra token pack ($10 = 500 tokens up to $200 = 10,000, or any amount from $10 to $500; the aiKit team adds them, usually the same day) or move to a bigger plan, which includes more tokens every month.

Open Settings → Billing and press Replace card next to Card on file (for example, Visa ending 4242 · expires 04/28). Enter the new card's number, expiration, security code and billing ZIP, then press Save card. Like the first time, the card goes straight to the payment processor and aiKit keeps only the brand and last four digits for display. Your next charge goes to the new card; nothing is charged when you save it. The one exception is a missed payment: if your last renewal didn't go through, the button reads Save card and pay with the amount, and that missed month is collected right away so your plan is back to normal. The same card is used for your plan and any storage add-on, so one update covers both. Once a plan has ended or been canceled, Remove card deletes the saved card from your account and the payment processor.

Open Settings → Billing and press Cancel plan at the bottom (or pick Free under Change plan). A confirmation explains what happens before anything changes. Renewals stop right away, so you won't be charged again, and you keep everything in your plan until the end of the month you already paid for. Then the account moves to Free. Nothing is deleted: your projects, files, clients and websites all stay where they are. Free has lower limits, so if you're over one, such as storage, new uploads pause until you make room or pick a plan again. Changed your mind before the month ends? Press Keep my plan on the Billing screen; renewals start again on the same day and nothing is charged right then. A storage add-on is canceled together with the plan.

Cards expire, get replaced, or hit a limit, so a monthly renewal sometimes doesn't go through. When that happens, aiKit emails you, and the Billing screen shows that the last payment didn't go through, with an Update card button. A declined card shows a red Card declined card with the bank's reason in plain words when it gives one. Your plan keeps working for 15 days while you fix it. Update the card in that time and the missed month is collected right away; everything carries on as before, including your renewal day. If nothing changes after 15 days, the plan ends and the account moves to Free. Even then, nothing is deleted: your projects and files stay, and you can choose a plan again whenever you like. Payments the processor holds for a fraud review are treated the same way, and the aiKit team is told so they can look into it.

On a paid plan, Settings → Billing lists three monthly storage add-ons: +50 GB for $8.88, +150 GB for $18.88 and +500 GB for $48.88. They're charged only when you add one. When moving up a plan would cost about the same or less and give you as much room, the screen says so and offers the plan first, with the add-on still available as a second choice. Adding one charges the add-on's price for the rest of the current month, then it renews on your plan's day, on the same card. A bigger add-on starts right away (you pay the difference for the rest of the month); a smaller one starts when your month renews. Removing one stops its charges, and the extra space stays until the paid month ends.

No. The card form on the Billing screen sends the card number, expiration, security code and ZIP straight from your browser to the payment processor, which hands back a one-time token. aiKit's servers receive only that token, use it once to set up your card with the processor, and keep just the card's brand and last four digits so the screen can say which card is on file. The full number and the security code are never sent to aiKit or saved by aiKit. Each charge is made by the processor against the card it holds for you, and every charge appears in Billing history with its receipt number, and in a receipt email.

For a website built from the planner, open the project's page and press Go live once the first build has finished. The site goes live right away at a temporary aiKit address, a real https address anyone can open, such as your-site-name.sites.aikit.ai (sites that went live earlier may use a your-site-name.vercel.app address instead; both work the same way). Later, connect your own domain from the project's Hosting tab. Building and going live are separate steps on purpose, so you can review and refine the site privately first. In the classic self-serve wizard, publishing asks for a free account if you don't have one yet (a live site needs a real owner), then shows a pre-publish checklist that lists any section still showing sample content. You choose your address, press Start creating, and the project is live within moments, with Copy link and Email it buttons to share it. Either way, before you go live, read every page, replace placeholder content, and press Check it works on each form.

A real, working website that anyone can open, on any device, at any hour. For a website built from the planner, you get a live https address that starts on a temporary aiKit address and can move to your own domain from the Hosting tab, with HTTPS turned on automatically. Every working tool you added (quote requests, contact, booking, lead capture, file uploads) sends entries to the project's Requests tab. You can keep changing the site by asking the Assistant or by pinning a spot, and every change goes live and is saved as a version you can undo (aiKit keeps the Original and your newest 10 versions). aiKit also checks that the site is reachable and shows Site is down on the Hosting tab if a check fails. A classic-wizard site lives at aikit.ai/s/your-project-name, with your sections, your style, a feature band if you picked features, and a feedback button for visitors. A custom address isn't offered for classic-wizard sites.

Yes, in a few ways, depending on where you built it. For a website built from the planner, the site isn't public until you press Go live, but you can still involve people. Give a teammate access as a builder or reviewer from the project's Settings tab, and they can open the project, see the preview, and leave pins. Send the client discovery questions from the project's Questions tab, or share the client's site plan link, where they can read the plan and approve pages, using the project's access code with no account needed. In the classic wizard, the Summary tab is built to be viewed or downloaded and handed to someone directly. A classic project only gets a public link once you publish it. For example, an agency can collect a client's answers and page approvals before the site is ever public.

On a classic-wizard site, every published page shows a small Leave Feedback button in the corner. A visitor taps it, types a message (name optional), and presses Submit. They see a confirmation and a Track this request link, so they can check its status later without asking you. On a website built from the planner, feedback works through pins. Anyone you give the project's access code can open the live site in edit mode, click the exact spot they mean, and describe the change. Signed-in teammates do the same from the project page with Pin a spot, or press Draw to mark a whole area. Each pin becomes a request on the project with its own status. A client who sends a long email of changes doesn't have to pin each one. Paste the email into Feedback in words and aiKit splits it into separate requests.

For classic-wizard sites, every message from the feedback button lands in your Feedback dashboard, tied to the project it came from. The dashboard has filters for All, Open, In Progress, Awaiting Review, and Confirmed, a Review First or Auto-Apply setting per project, and a change log on every item. When you mark something fixed with a short note on what you checked, the person who sent it can press Confirm this is fixed. For websites built from the planner, pins and requests land on the project's own page and on the All feedback page across every project. Each one can be sent to the AI with Ask AI to do it, moves to Working on it, and ends as Fixed with a link to the live result. Form submissions, such as quote requests and bookings, go to a separate Requests tab, so customer leads and site changes never mix.

Yes. Your projects belong to your account and aren't public until you choose to publish. For websites built from the planner, only people you've given access to can open the project: you, your team members, and reviewers you add. A project's id appearing in a live site's code doesn't open anything; client-facing pages require the project's access code. Clients using that code never see staff notes, internal lines marked internal or staff only, other clients, or other projects. Files customers send through Send us your file can be downloaded only by the project's owner, staff, and admins. In the classic wizard, a draft started before you sign up is tied to your current browser session, not listed or searchable anywhere. Once you publish, the content on the live pages is public by design, so read every page before going live, as you would with any public page.

aiKit never presents an invented review as real. In the classic wizard, when there's no real customer quote yet, which is true for every new project, aiKit writes a placeholder so the section isn't empty, and gives that section a visible Sample badge that stays until you replace it with an actual quote. The text itself reads normally, so a visitor isn't confused by broken-looking words, but you can see at a glance what still needs replacing, and the pre-publish checklist lists it. For websites built from the planner, the AI is told not to invent facts about your business and follows your Brief & rules on every change. The best practice is simple: before going live, swap any placeholder review for a real one, with the customer's permission. Ask the Assistant: "Replace the reviews with these three from our customers," and paste them in.

Honesty is built into how aiKit works, not just stated in a policy. First, aiKit's AI is told not to invent facts, claims, or details you didn't provide. When something important is missing, it leaves a clear placeholder or lists it as an open question. Second, risky specifics are left blank on purpose: legal wording, license numbers, and real prices are never guessed, and the AI tells you plainly what it left out. Third, invented placeholder content in the classic wizard carries a visible Sample flag until you replace it. The checks go beyond the words. After a build, every tool you picked is looked for in the real files, and anything missing is marked Not found in the output, needs a person, instead of being reported as done. Quote pages never get an invented phone number or email, and the quote builder only shows prices you entered.

No. aiKit's AI is told never to invent facts, claims, or details you didn't give it. Where it has to fill a gap because you haven't provided something yet, it marks the gap clearly instead of presenting a guess as fact. In the classic wizard that's the visible Sample flag; in the planner, missing details show up as open questions on the plan. Your tagline and business description also stay general rather than guessing a narrower business than the one you described. If you said "home services," it won't decide you're a plumber. The best protection is to tell aiKit the facts. Add them under Brief & rules on the project, such as hours, service area, phone, and words to use or avoid. The AI reads them before every build and edit. If it picks up a fact during a chat, it files it under Learned as unconfirmed, and you confirm or remove it.

Yes. For a website built from the planner, the project page shows a live preview of the real site, not a summary, as soon as the first build finishes, with Desktop, Tablet, and Phone views. You can make changes, pin spots, and review every page, and nothing is reachable by the public until you press Go live. In the classic wizard, the Live Preview tab shows the real rendered page while you're still refining it, before you create an account or publish. A good habit before going live: click through every page on the Phone view, read every heading and button, and press Check it works on each form. That last step sends one clearly marked test entry through the real form, so you know entries will arrive on the Requests tab.

The Client Hub (not the same as aiKit Hub, the project and client tool at aikit.ai/tools/hub) belongs to the classic self-serve wizard. The feedback widget is for anyone visiting a published classic site. The Client Hub is a separate, password-protected page for one specific client. You open it from the small chat button next to a published project in your projects list, set a password of at least 6 characters, and copy the client's link. Your client then has three tabs: Questions (your questions, optionally multiple choice), Review & Approve (the live page with Desktop and Mobile views, pins, and Approve this round), and Requests (everything they've asked for, with its status). For websites built from the planner, the same jobs are handled by the project's access code: a client link for Recent updates, a Questions page you send, a site plan they can approve page by page, and pins right on the live site.

No. In the classic wizard's Client Hub, your client only needs the link you send and the password you set. There's no signup and no login of their own. They enter the password once, and their browser stays signed in after that. If you ever need to cut off access, use Change password. It immediately signs out every device that was using the old password. The same no-account approach applies to websites built from the planner. Clients use the project's access code to answer discovery questions, read and approve the site plan, see their own leads page, and leave pins on the live site. Keep the code private, and share it only with the people who should have it, the same as you would with a password.

In the classic wizard's Client Hub, the moment your client answers a question it shows up in your Client Hub manager, right under the question, with who answered it. There's nothing to refresh or export. The answered question also moves to your client's own Answered list, so they can see what they've already told you. Answered questions are locked, so the record of what was asked and said stays intact. For websites built from the planner, answers to the questionnaire you send from the Questions page land in the project's Brief & rules automatically, where the AI reads them before every build and edit. Export answers downloads every round as a plain-text file. If an answer leaves a real gap, the AI can add one to three follow-up questions to the same link, and most rounds get none.

In the classic wizard's Client Hub, your client opens the Review & Approve tab and sees your real live page in a preview with a Desktop and Mobile toggle. They can press Pin a comment, click the exact spot they mean, and type what should change; that pin lands in your Feedback dashboard like any other request. When they're happy, they press Approve this round. You start the next round from your side, and the round history (v1, v2, and so on) stays visible to both of you. For websites built from the planner, approval happens page by page on the client's site plan link. Each built page has an Approve button; the client types their name, adds a note if they like, and approves. If the page changes afterward, it shows Changed since you approved, so nothing slips through.

Yes. In the classic wizard's Client Hub, the Requests tab is for exactly that: anything not tied to a single spot, such as "add a testimonials section" or "the site feels slow on my phone." It shows live counts by status (Requested, In Progress, Done, Verified) and lists everything the client has asked for, pinned or not. When you mark something Done with a note, the client sees Confirm this is fixed and closes the loop. For websites built from the planner, send general requests your way however the client prefers, then turn them into tracked requests: paste a long email, call notes, or a transcript into Feedback in words on the Assistant's Pins tab. aiKit splits it into one request per change, each aimed at the right page, and keeps the original text under Notes in Brief & rules.

Projects is where every website you build with the planner lives, along with its tools, requests, versions, and client work. It's for anyone who signs in: a business owner running one site, a real estate agent, or an agency or print shop managing dozens of client sites. In the new layout, open Projects in the sidebar to search and filter your sites, or Clients to see each client's sites together. Each project has its own page with a live preview, the Assistant for changes, the Requests tab for form entries, a Hosting tab for its address and domain, and a Kit tab for its tools. The full list at aikit.ai/projects, with a rail of every project grouped by client, opens inside the same layout. Your clients don't need an account. They use the project's access code to see their leads, answer questions, approve pages, and pin changes on the live site.

Each project has one page with one row of tabs, and every control lives under exactly one of them. Overview shows where the project stands (build progress and Go live), what needs you, next steps, and technical details. Edit is the one place for changing the site by pointing at it: the live preview with Pin a spot and Draw, Edit on the live site, Quick edit, and Redesign this site. Feedback lists every request from Open to Confirmed. Versions has every saved version with Restore, and what shipped. Questions, Requests, and Kit hold your client's questions, your site's leads, and its tools. Plan & brief has the site plan document, Brief & rules, the original brief, and the build details. Hosting has the address, status, Go live or Redeploy, and the domain guide. Settings has who can work on it, your client's links, how changes go live (wait for Publish, or publish automatically), project details, and Clone. Open the editor, at the top of every tab, opens the chat beside the page. Old links to aikit.ai/projects/<project> still work and open the matching tab.

Yes, for the whole aiKit site. The switch sits in the header of every page: a sun icon while you're in dark mode, a moon icon while you're in light mode. On public pages like the homepage, FAQ, and Help, it's next to Start a Project; once you're signed in, it's in the top bar on every page, including Projects, Printer’s Helper, and the other tools. One choice covers every page and is remembered in your browser. It's applied before each page draws, so nothing flashes the other look when you reload. If you never choose, aiKit follows your device's setting: light, or dark when your device is set to dark. Websites aiKit hosts for you and your clients keep their own design and are never affected by this switch.

It means anyone with the link can open the site, at a free, temporary hosting address made from the project's name instead of your own domain name. Every site starts here the moment you press Go live. It's a real, working address, not a private preview, but the projects list shows it as Not live yet, because customers searching for the business still reach whatever is on the business's own domain. It turns Live once the domain points at aiKit and answers. Forms work, entries reach your Requests tab, and changes you make go live there. The only thing missing is your business name in the address. You'll see this status on the project's Hosting tab. When you're ready, connect a domain like yourbusiness.com from that same tab. Connecting a domain changes only the address people use to reach the site, never the site itself, and aiKit turns on HTTPS for it automatically once the records are in place.

Live on the projects list means real visitors reach the site: it answers on the client's own domain, and that domain points at aiKit. A project that only has a temporary aiKit address, or whose domain still points at another host, shows Not live yet, even though the temporary address works. Hover the label to see which case applies, and open the project's Hosting tab to connect the domain or check it again. For example, a repair shop's new site can be finished and reviewed on its temporary address while the shop's own domain still shows the old site; it reads Live only after the domain is switched over.

It says exactly what the project is waiting for, taken from its real records, and only the most important thing shows. Examples: Waiting for answers to 4 questions (sent Oct 2), Waiting for you to review a change request, Waiting for your reply to a client message, Waiting on the build, Waiting for the client to check a fix, and Waiting on domain setup. Click the line to open the records it counts, such as the project's Questions, Feedback, Requests, or Hosting tab. When nothing is waiting, there is no status line.

It means aiKit's automatic check failed to reach the site just now. It doesn't mean anything was deleted; the project's files are safe on aiKit either way. Work through it in this order. First, open the site yourself on your phone with Wi-Fi turned off, which rules out a problem with one network. Then click Check again on the project's Hosting tab for a fresh reading; a short blip often clears on its own. If the site is on your own domain, check with your registrar whether the domain recently expired or its records were changed, since a lapsed domain is the most common real cause. Still down after that? Message the aiKit team from the project's chat and describe what you saw. The Hosting tab also has a technical snapshot you can hand to a developer or your registrar's support team.

Open the project's Hosting tab. If you don't own a domain yet, buy one first from a reputable registrar such as Cloudflare Registrar, Namecheap, or GoDaddy. Then, in your registrar's DNS settings, add two records. An A record for the bare domain (Name @) with the value 76.76.21.21, and a CNAME record named www with the value cname.vercel-dns.com (that value is the address of the hosting service aiKit uses; type it exactly as shown). The Hosting tab has click-by-click instructions for GoDaddy, Namecheap, Cloudflare, Squarespace or Google Domains, Wix, and Bluehost or HostGator, with each value ready to copy. Most registrars pick up the records within minutes to a few hours, rarely up to 48 hours. aiKit turns on HTTPS automatically once they do; there's nothing else to set up. Email on the domain keeps working as long as you leave its MX records alone, since those are separate from the two records above. Press Check again to see the latest status.

They're the two halves of aiKit's catalog of things a project can include. The Site kit is sections and features that become part of the website itself: pages, forms, galleries, booking, search setup, and more. The Business tools kit is tools that run alongside the website instead of inside it, such as marketing automation, invoicing, customer records, quotes, staff tools, and reporting. You pick from both kits when planning a project, and you can add more later from the project's Kit tab or the full Kit Explorer. Any item can carry its own note about what should be different for that client, such as "show only the top six reviews." Business tools aren't faked inside a website. When one isn't a ready tool yet, it's listed on the plan as a work item so nothing is promised that isn't built.

The project is created right away and its first build starts in the background. You land on the project's own page, which shows live progress with a clock and a plain sense of how long builds like this usually take. It's safe to leave and come back. When the build finishes, the page shows a preview of the real site, a Build plan & files card listing what was built, and Next steps suggesting what to do now. You can already make changes through the Assistant, pin spots on the preview, and fill in Brief & rules. Nothing is public yet. The site only becomes reachable by visitors when someone presses Go live on the project page, a separate, deliberate step. That gives you time to replace placeholder content, add real photos, and press Check it works on each form first.

A first build creates a whole site: every page, its copy, and each tool you picked, or it imports an existing site to work from. Then aiKit checks the result, looks for every tool you picked in the real files, asks the AI once more for anything missing, and writes a plan describing what was built. That takes a few minutes, so it runs in the background. If a build fails, nothing is lost. The plan and everything you entered stay saved on the project page, and a progress log shows what went wrong in plain words. The most common cause on an import is a source address that doesn't load. Fix what the log points to, then press Retry build. For example, if the log says the old site's address returned an error, check the address in a browser, correct it, and retry.

Yes, in two ways. The first: on New project, open Detailed setup, choose Bring files from another AI tool, and either pick the zip the tool exported (up to 300 MB, uploaded after you press Create project) or paste a public GitHub repository address. aiKit unpacks it and drops dependency folders and any secret .env files so they're never published. A plain site that's ready as exported is hosted exactly as it is, with no changes to your design or copy. Only a project that isn't deployable as it stands gets a light pass that fixes paths. The project then shows Ready for Go live. The second way skips the export: connect the tool from the Connect page and say "publish this to aiKit" in its chat. Private GitHub repositories aren't supported, so export a zip instead. Keep in mind aiKit hosts sites that don't need their own server.

On your computer, the site is a folder, or a preview link that only works while the AI tool is open. Nobody else can open it, it stops when your laptop sleeps, and it's tied to your own connection. Publishing to aiKit copies the files to aiKit's hosting and gives them a normal https address that stays up day and night, on any device, whether your computer is on or off. There's nothing to install and nothing tied to your home internet. You also gain everything around the site: the Assistant for changes in plain words, pins on the live page, versions you can undo, forms that send entries to your Requests tab, and a private leads page for your client. Add your own domain whenever you're ready. Every published site starts with a 90-day free hosting period.

Both, whenever you like. That's the point of connecting a project. Way 1: keep building in the AI tool you used. Through the connector it sends only the changed files, and aiKit saves a new version and puts it live. This suits big changes while the site is still taking shape. Way 2: work directly in aiKit. Anyone with the site's access code can pin a spot and request a change on the live page, and signed-in teammates can use the Assistant, add working quote, contact, or booking pages from the Kit, and keep the client's facts in Brief & rules. This suits day-to-day changes. Neither side has to wait for the other, and every change becomes its own version. One edge case: if the same file changes on both sides at nearly the same moment, the later save stays live, and the other sits in Versions, one click from being restored.

You can connect the tool, but aiKit doesn't host that kind of project. Connecting only gives a tool permission to send files; it doesn't change what aiKit can run. aiKit hosts websites made of files that don't need a live server. That rules out user accounts or passwords checked against a server, a database that saves records per user, a paid service called with a secret key while the site runs, payments that complete on a server, and anything that needs a server running all the time, like background jobs. If your project needs any of those, publishing it to aiKit would give you a stripped-down shell at best. Host it on its own server and database instead, and keep building it with your AI tool as you do today. Contact, quote, and booking forms are the exception: aiKit wires plain forms to its own system after upload. The Help guide on Connect has the full list.

A zip or GitHub project is hosted as it was uploaded, and from that moment the live site, pins, and the Assistant all work on it, so most later changes can simply be asked for in aiKit. If you'd rather keep making changes in the AI tool you built it with, connect that tool from the Connect page. It then sends its updates into the same project, alongside any changes made in aiKit, and each update becomes a version you can undo. Before a big rebuild in the other tool, ask the Assistant to list what has changed in aiKit since the first upload, such as new pages, wording fixes, or forms added from the Kit. That way you can carry those changes into your tool and nothing made in aiKit gets lost.

Yes. Open Connect a site under Projects in the sidebar and create a key. The key is shown once; label it with the tool's name. You can set it to expire, or make it read-only so the tool can look up your projects but never publish or change files. Then follow the copy-and-paste setup for your tool. AI chat apps that support custom connectors get one address to paste. AI coding assistants that run in a terminal get one command. ChatGPT uses a developer-mode connector, and Cursor and similar editors use a small settings file. After that, say "publish this site to aiKit as Maple Street Bakery" to create a project with the real files, or "update my aiKit site" to send changes. Revoke a key any time from the same page. The Stuck? Ask here button on the Connect page looks at a screenshot of your screen and tells you which field comes next.

Every Site kit item you pick is treated as a checklist item, not a suggestion. The build marks each one in the real files, and after the build finishes aiKit looks for every one of them. Anything missing is requested from the AI once more, and then the result is recorded. The project page shows the result on the Build plan & files card as N of M built, with the file each one lives in, or Not found in the output, needs a person for anything still missing. The Kit tab shows the same state for each item: Built, with a link to it on the live site, Not in the build, or Planned. Business tools such as invoicing or customer records are never faked inside a website; they're listed as work items instead. For a working form, press Check it works on its card to send a marked test entry through it.

PLAN.md is a written plan the AI produces at the end of a first build. It covers the pages it built and why, the tools it built, any business tools that still need work, the brand decisions it made, and open questions for the client. A build is required to write one. If it doesn't, a follow-up pass asks again. If that also fails, aiKit writes a short, honest version from what it can verify and labels it that way, so you never read an invented plan. You'll find it as readable text on the project's Build plan & files card, next to the real file list. It's a useful first read after any build. For an always-current view of the whole site, including pages, tools, and client approvals, open the project's Site plan, which updates after every change.

To the project's Requests tab. When a project includes the quote request form, aiKit adds its own tested Get a quote page, with fields and choices filled from the brief and never an invented phone number or email, and links it from the site's menu. When a visitor presses Send, the request goes straight to aiKit. It works as a plain form, so it needs no special setup and no email configuration. Each request shows the person's contact details, what they need, how soon, up to four photos (shrunk on the phone first), a status (New, Contacted, Won, Closed), and a private note for your team. The projects list shows N new requests on the site's row until they're moved out of New. Contact form messages, bookings, lead sign-ups, file uploads, and quote builder requests all land on the same tab, each with its own badge.

Yes. Every project has a private leads page at aikit.ai/p/<project>/requests. It's linked from the client's Recent updates page, and you can copy it from the Requests tab. The page asks for the project's access code, the same code the client uses to leave feedback on their site. It then shows every quote request, message, and booking, with contact details, photos, and a status the client can update. Your team's private notes never appear there, and files sent through Send us your file show that a file arrived, without offering the file itself. Every new project gets its own access code when it's created. An older project without one keeps the page closed to everyone except its team until a code exists; copying a client link creates one.

Yes, with the Send us your file tool. Add it from the Tool library or the project's Kit tab, and your site gets a page where customers choose up to 3 files, 4 MB together, in PDF, AI, EPS, SVG, PNG, JPG, TIFF, or PSD format. They say what the file is and what it's for, then press Send. For larger files, the page points them to your email or phone. Each send lands on the project's Requests tab with a File badge, File received, and each file's name and size. Only the project's owner, staff, and admins can download the files. Reviewers and the client's leads page see that a file arrived, but not the file itself, and files always download rather than opening in the browser. Each print file is also checked automatically as it arrives (size, bleed, resolution, fonts, colors); the result shows on the request with a Fix it in Printer’s Helper button, and your customer never sees it. A person still checks each file before anything prints. It's useful for sign makers, designers, and anyone who needs artwork or documents from customers.

Press Check it works on the tool's card in the project's Kit tab. aiKit sends one clearly marked test entry through the real form, using an example.com address that never receives mail. You then see Tested, working with the time, or a plain sentence saying what went wrong. The test entry is saved on the Requests tab labeled Test and hidden unless you press Show test entries. It's never counted as a new request, never holds a booking slot, and never triggers an email or notification, so your client won't be confused by it. Owners and staff can run a check, and reviewers can see the last result. A good habit: run it on every form right before going live, and again after any big change to the site.

New project opens the planner on a chat box: describe the project and press Send. It talks it through one thing at a time by default; Change in the chat bar switches to Answer a few quick questions myself, Fill in the detailed form, or Save & send the client questions first, and Make my choices the default keeps your pick. Under the box, pick or add the client and choose a Voice: a preset tone, one of your saved Brand Voice profiles (it goes to the planner and the brief, and becomes the project's voice), or your own words. More details holds their current site, up to 20 brand files, Graphics Library picks, and Pick a look from up to six approved reference sites. When there's enough, the planner writes the plan: pages, tools with reasons, brand, search phrases, FAQ topics, a photo brief, and open questions. Refine it in chat, then press Build this project. The six-step wizard is still there as Detailed setup, for zips, GitHub links, and hand-picking every Kit item.

It's where you work on a site by asking. Open the editor, at the top of every project page, opens a panel with a plain chat and four tools. Feedback holds requests about exact spots of the site, Versions lists the Original and your newest 10 changes with one-click restore, Brief & rules holds the living notes the AI reads before every change, and Kit lets you preview and add tools. The panel docks to the right side, or expands to a split screen with the live site beside it. Type or dictate a request, attach files (pictures, or documents such as a PDF menu, a Word price list, or an Excel sheet; signed in, up to 10 files of up to 50 MB each), and press Enter. A question gets an answer. A change is made in the real site files, published if the site is live, and saved as a version. While it works you see each step, such as searching the site, editing a page, and publishing, with a clock. Most small changes land in under a minute.

Yes. Press the paperclip in a project's chat (the editor window, the editor on your live site, or Request a change after importing a site) and pick the file. The chat takes PDF, Word (.doc, .docx), Excel (.xls, .xlsx), CSV, and plain text files as well as pictures: signed in as a member of the project, up to 10 files a message, 50 MB each and 150 MB together. Each file uploads the moment you pick it and shows as a chip with its name, type, and a progress bar; Send waits until the uploads finish. Without signing in (a client using the site's access code), up to 4 files of 4.5 MB each. A file attached but never sent is deleted after 24 hours. Then say what to do with it, for example "Put this menu on the Menu page" or "Update the prices to match this list." The AI reads the document's words and looks at its first pages for layout and photos, copies names and prices exactly as written, and never makes up items. Files are checked by what they really contain: programs, Office files with macros, and files whose contents don't match their name are refused with the reason.

They're shortcuts for people who make a lot of changes. In a project's chat, press the ∞ button next to the microphone to open Your rules and commands. It keeps three things. Standing rules are a few lines loaded into every project you chat with, on every request, such as how you spell things, what never to invent, or how buttons should read. If they disagree with a project's Brief & rules, the Brief & rules wins. The ∞ command runs whenever a message ends with ∞; the built-in one checks the whole site for consistency with your change and reports what changed, and you can write your own. Slash commands pair a short name with what it does; type / in the chat to pick one, and it expands into the box before you send. Rules and commands belong to your account and follow you to every project. A client using the access code has none of them.

On the project's Kit tab. Each tool on the site has a card with this site's own numbers and Check it works. Under the cards, On the plan, not on the site yet lists anything picked that isn't built: Planned, or Not in the build when the last build didn't make that page. Add a tool to this site opens the Kit Explorer, a full page with every category, a detailed preview of each item, and a fuller add panel. Business tools that run alongside the site, and the parts of this project (a store or client portal next to the site, for example), have their own cards at the bottom of the tab. In the new layout, the Projects page can also be filtered by tool, for example to find every site that has online booking.

Yes. Above the preview on a project's Edit tab, or in the panel on the live site, press Draw (or Draw a line on the editor's Feedback view) and drag a straight line across the area with your mouse or finger. The line pauses so you can press Undo and redraw it, or confirm it with Use this area. That area becomes the request's target: the AI is told which element sits under it, how big the area is, and where it is on the page. So "make this bigger" or "swap this photo" lands on the right thing. On the live site, an orange line stays where you drew until the page reloads. Then describe the change and press Ask AI to do it, or save the request for later. For example, draw across a row of three service cards and write "make these the same height and add icons."

Yes: Redesign this site, at the bottom of the project's Edit tab (and on the editor window's Feedback view). Press Draft a direction, and the AI picks a few of your approved reference sites that fit the project's industry, reads their real palette, type, and layout, and writes one concrete art direction: a named color palette with real hex values, a type pairing, the section rhythm, several named signature sections, and rules for motion and icons. Prefer to choose? Press Choose references and pick up to six from your library. Read the brief, edit any line, or redraft from different references, then press Run redesign. It changes every page, not just the home page, through the same edit process as any other change. It uses more than a single edit and usually takes 7 to 11 minutes, both shown on the button before you start. Past runs stay listed with their brief and a before and after screenshot of the homepage.

Because each reference takes real work to use well. Grounding a design in a reference means reading that page's actual code and having the AI describe its design: palette, type, the top section, motion, and section rhythm. A handful, five, or up to six if you choose them, keeps the direction focused instead of blending dozens of different looks into something muddy. The automatic match still considers your whole library when picking that handful. It ranks every approved site by industry and keyword fit before falling back to the most recent ones, so it isn't limited to a small fixed slice. To choose exactly which sites ground a direction, press Choose references, on Redesign this site and on Pick a look when planning a new project. It opens a searchable grid of your full library, with filters by industry.

No. On the project's Feedback tab, press Add feedback in words (it opens the editor window's Feedback view), then paste the whole email (or call notes, or a transcript), choose From the client, and press Turn into requests. The AI splits it into one open request per change, each aimed at the page it belongs to, and keeps the original text under Notes in Brief & rules. Nothing on the site changes yet. Each request has its own Ask AI button, shows Working on it while the change is made, and ends as Fixed with a link to the live result, so you can see every change start and finish. If you only want the text on file as background, press Save as a note instead. Splitting uses a little AI (it shows as split on the Usage page) but never counts as an edit. For one long, connected request, it can be clearer to send it to the editor's chat as a single message.

Open the Questions tab on any project page, new or already live. Type what you know or want to ask, from a few notes to a long brief, and press Draft questions. The AI proposes a set, skipping anything already in Brief & rules, and picks fill-in or multiple choice for each. A multiple-choice question can allow several answers and can offer an Other choice with its own text box. Writing your own question? Suggest options proposes realistic choices for it. Nothing is sent yet. Edit any question or its options, switch a question's type, uncheck or delete ones you don't want, or add your own, then press Send. That creates the project's link: Copy link, or Email it, which opens your own email app with the address and link filled in. aiKit doesn't email the client for you. The client answers with no account, saving as they go, and presses I'm done, send everything. Answers land in Brief & rules. A real gap can bring one to three follow-up questions to the same link. Export answers downloads every round as a text file.

Yes to both. A questionnaire can be written in English and Spanish. The client's page opens in the project's main language with an English / Español switch at the top that changes every question, choice, tip, heading, the intro, and the buttons at once. The microphone listens in the language that's showing. Multiple-choice answers are stored in the main language's wording, so your records stay consistent. Questions can be kept as drafts first. They sit on the project's Questions page, where you edit both languages, reorder, delete, or add more, and the client sees nothing until you press Send. Turn on Ask the client for photos, and the page ends with a Photos section. The client picks many photos at once and adds a note and a tag to each, such as Before, After, or Finished job. Everything saves on its own. You see the photos on the Questions page with a Download button for each.

Yes, and you don't need a plan first. On the planner's first screen, press Save & send the client questions first (Detailed setup has the same button on its first stage). Name the client and project, and it's created right away, with no planner conversation and no build, and you land on its Questions page to draft and send discovery questions. The project shows On hold, questions first on the list and its own page. Once the client answers, press Continue to planner. The planner reads their answers from Brief & rules, so it won't re-ask anything, and writes the plan. Then choose Save the plan, which saves it as the project's site plan without building so you can keep refining it, or Save the plan & start the build to do both. Start the build now, no plan builds straight from what's on file. A project that already has a plan can also be held with Save & ask questions first.

Yes. Open the project's Versions tab (or Versions in the editor window). Every chat change, pin fix, first build, publish from another AI tool, and restore is a numbered version with a full copy of the site's files at that moment. Press Restore on any older version. aiKit first saves the current state as Before restoring, then puts the older files back, publishes them if the site is live, and records the restore as its own version. So a restore can be undone too. aiKit keeps the Original (the site before the first change) and the newest 10 versions; when an 11th change arrives, the oldest one after the Original is removed for good, so restore anything you want back before then, or press Star on a version to keep it however old (up to 20 starred per project). The version that's live now and a draft waiting for review are never removed either. For example, if a change to the home page looks wrong, find the version just before it in the list, press Restore, and the site goes back to how it looked, usually within a moment. Then describe what you actually wanted in the chat, and aiKit makes the change again the right way.

It's the living set of notes the AI reads before every build, edit, and chat reply. There's one per client, and each project can add its own entries on top of the client's. Entries are short and filed under Business facts, Brand, Rules & instructions, Content guidelines, Approved styles, Decisions, Notes, and Learned. Add one in plain words from the Assistant's Brief & rules tab, and choose whether it applies to every site for that client or only this one. For example: "Hours are 7 to 3, closed Sundays," or "Never show prices; always say Call for a quote." When the AI learns something lasting in conversation, it files it under Learned as unconfirmed, and you confirm or remove it. The planner also adds brand notes, search phrases, and FAQ topics from the plan. Client questionnaire answers land here too, so everything the AI should know lives in one place.

Open Usage in the projects navigation. Pick this week, this month, the last 30 days, all time, or any two dates. At the top you see the totals for that period: edits that changed a site, questions answered for free, first builds, and the cost. Below that is a chart by day, and a table with one row per client. Each row shows the client's link tokens a month (a link to change it), along with that period's edits, questions, builds, and tokens used. Open a row to see each of that client's projects. Clients who have used 50, 80, or 100 percent of their plan are listed at the top, so you can ask for more tokens before anyone gets stuck. Splitting a long email into requests shows separately as split.

Every published site starts with a 90-day free hosting period on an aiKit address, with a small Built with aiKit ∞ badge. Paid yearly hosting after that is coming soon, and prices aren't published yet; until then, sites stay live. AI edits come with a free allowance. Every edit uses your account's tokens. Changes a client asks for from their own link also stop at that client's monthly token amount (2,000 to start), which you can change on the client's page. An edit is a change the Assistant actually makes to a site; questions are free. The Assistant's header shows how many are left. When they run out, it offers Ask for more tokens, and more are added by aiKit, never billed by surprise. The first build is Standard on every plan, with an optional Premium design build add-on for the first build only. The reason for metering is simple: each AI edit costs real money to run, while hosting a site doesn't.

Most of them, through one of two routes. Connected tools publish straight from their chat. AI chat apps that support custom connectors use one address you paste in. AI coding assistants that run in a terminal use one command. ChatGPT uses a developer-mode connector, and Cursor, Windsurf, and VS Code use a small settings file. All of them use a key you make on the Connect page. Other tools, such as Lovable, Bolt, v0, and Replit, export a zip or a GitHub link that you upload under New project, then Detailed setup. Every route comes with a copy-and-paste prompt. Paste it at the start of the chat where you build, before you describe the site. It tells the tool exactly how to shape the files, how to build forms so aiKit can wire them up, and to use clear placeholders rather than invented facts.

Yes. The first build is a starting point. It puts the structure, the pages, and the working tools in place so there's something real to react to, and the project's Overview tab says so the first time you see it. From there, the site gets better by being worked on. Pin a spot and describe the change. Tell the editor what to do in plain words, such as "make the hero photo full width and shorten the headline." Swap in real photos from the photo brief, because nothing improves a site faster than real pictures of the business. Fill in Brief & rules so the AI knows the business. If the look itself is wrong, use Redesign this site on the Edit tab. aiKit keeps the Original and the newest 10 versions, so undo a change you don't like soon after you make it. Every change is a version you can undo, so it's safe to experiment. Next steps on the project page suggests what's worth doing first.

Yes. On a project page, open the Edit tab and press Edit on the live site. The real site opens in a new tab with an Edit with aiKit button in the corner. Public visitors never see that button; it appears only in the tab you opened with that link. The button opens the same editor beside the page: chat that changes the site, Feedback pins that land on the exact element you click, Draw for a whole area, and Versions. When a change lands, the page reloads so you see it on the real site right away. This is often the most natural way to review a site, because you're looking at exactly what customers see. For example, scroll to the footer, click the hours, and type "change Saturday to 9 to 1." Every site aiKit hosts carries the small script that makes this work; it's added when the site is built and before every publish.

No, not unless you want it to. On a live site, every change the AI makes (a chat request, a pin fix, Quick edit, a redesign, a multi-site run, or files sent from a connected tool) is saved as a draft. The public site stays as it is while you look at the draft next to the live page, side by side or with a slider, on computer, tablet, and phone sizes. Automatic checks look for missing pictures, broken links, script errors, forms that stopped sending, and errors when the page opens in a real browser. Then someone with edit rights presses Publish. You can also ask for more changes to the same draft, or discard it. Owners who prefer the old way can turn on Publish automatically in the project's Settings.

Yes. On the review screen, press Send proof to your client (it's also in the project's header and on the Versions tab). Pick the draft, the pages, and desktop, phone, or both, and your client gets a private link with no account needed: a full-page picture of each page to mark up with pins, boxes, arrows, and notes, and Click through the live preview to use the draft as a working site. They approve or ask for changes, and their changes land in the project's Feedback tab with the page and the spot. Approving never publishes; someone with edit rights still presses Publish. Preview links made before website proofs existed keep working until you publish or discard, and the review screen offers Turn it off for them.

Open the project's Versions tab, find the version you want back, press Restore, then Restore and publish. The older version goes live in one step and the publish is recorded with your name. Restore as a draft brings it back for review first instead. Every publish is its own version. aiKit keeps the Original and the newest 10 versions, plus any you star to keep (up to 20); the version that's live now and any waiting draft are never removed by the automatic clean-up either.

Yes. On the projects list, tick the checkbox on each site's thumbnail, then press Ask the AI for N sites in the bar that appears (or open One change, many sites from Clients). Describe the change once and press Start. aiKit runs it on its own server, one site at a time, so you can close the tab and come back to the run's page later. Each site gets a full, separate edit with its own version you can undo, and it uses one AI edit per site. On live sites the change is saved as a draft: the run page shows a before and after for every site, with Publish per site or Publish all ready, after automatic checks. Nothing goes live until you publish. A site that changed nothing or hit an error says why, with Run it again. For example, update a holiday closure notice across every location's site, check each one, then publish them all in one press.

In the new layout, open Projects and type in the search box; it matches project names, client names, and web addresses. Filter by status or by tool, and use the quick filters. When a filter is on, a Showing bar with Show all takes you back to everything. On the classic list at aikit.ai/projects, the left rail lists every project grouped by client and scrolls on its own. Type in Jump to a project at the top to narrow it, click a project to open it, or click a client to filter the list to that client. Advanced filters adds Client and Project dropdowns you can combine, plus three date ranges: Created, Last change made, and Changes requested. Every filter is kept in the page address, so a filtered view can be bookmarked or shared with a teammate.

On the full projects list at aikit.ai/projects, click All feedback at the top. It opens the Feedback page for every project, already filtered to items that need your team's work. Or click a specific project's N need our work count to see only that project's items. The Waiting on us chip on the projects list filters the whole list down to projects that have something open. From the Feedback page you can narrow further by who filed it, by client or project, and by keyword. Clicking any item opens that exact request, highlighted, on its project's Feedback tab. In the new layout, Home shows what needs you today across your projects and tools, and the bell in the top bar opens the same list. Each entry links straight to the thing it's about, so you can work through the day from one place.

It's the badge the Kit Explorer shows on each item before you add anything. Ready now means the item is one of aiKit's tested tools: real code that renders an actual page, with sample details standing in for yours, the same template a live site gets. Quote requests, the contact form, online booking, lead capture, Send us your file, and the quote builder are all Ready now. Built for you means it's part of the catalog but has no tested, ready-made template yet. Adding it puts it on the plan and files a work item, and it's built into the site's own pages and wording the same way any other AI change is made. Both are real. The badge only tells you whether you can see the finished shape right now or need to picture it from a description. In the Tool library, items without a ready tool yet are listed as Coming soon.

For a Ready now tool, yes. The preview is a live view of the actual tested page, with sample details standing in for yours. Opened inside a project, a Show in this site's colors toggle even redraws it with that project's own brand colors and name, so you can see how it will sit on the site. For a Built for you item, it depends. The e-commerce and online-course items open a working preview: a full sample site you can click through, in the layout variation you pick, with invented products and lessons standing in for yours. Your version is built in your own brand, wording, and prices. Other Built for you items show a simple line illustration of the layout plus a written walkthrough of what a visitor sees and what you get, captioned plainly as an illustration so a sketch is never mistaken for the finished result. In the Tool library, each ready tool also shows real screenshots of what it looks like and what it does, before you put it in a kit.

Yes. In the Kit, every E-commerce / Online Store tool (catalog, cart and checkout, payments, shipping, discounts and gift cards, reviews, bundles, sales tax, customer accounts, order emails, returns, and inventory) and every Online Courses & Digital Products tool (scheduled lessons, course builder, progress tracking, quizzes, free previews, certificates, protected video, lesson Q&A, digital downloads, and bundles) opens a working sample site. In the sample shop you filter products, pick a color and size and watch the picture and price change, add to the cart, enter a discount code, estimate shipping by ZIP code, and check out to a confirmation page. In the sample course you play lessons, mark them complete, take a quiz, and skip ahead a week to watch scheduled lessons open. Each tool also offers two or three layout variations, like a grid, list, or featured shop, a slide-out cart or a cart page, and one-page or step-by-step checkout. Switch between them in the preview, check it on Desktop and Phone, and the one showing when you press Add to plan is the one that gets built. Nothing in a preview is charged, saved, or sent.

The Plan & brief tab opens on a site plan written the way a good agency hands one to a client. Your team sees Build steps first (each with a Make it button), then nine numbered sections: overview and goals (each with how it will be measured), audience, strategy (positioning, search phrases and how the site earns search traffic, and how visitors become customers), a sitemap of every page with its job and whether it's built or planned, every module and tool with what it does for this business, how it's set up and whether it's Planned, Built or Live, a content plan with the content guidelines, a timeline in phases, decisions, and open questions. What exists comes from measuring the real site, so the plan never claims a page or tool that isn't there. The client's answers become plain decisions rather than a pasted list of questions and answers. Opening the tab never spends anything: the strategy parts are written when you press Write the plan, and Update the plan rewrites them after the brief, the site or the answers change. A page that is on the site is never listed as a page to add, even when the plan names it differently ("Request a Repair" for the request form's page). Your client sees the same plan on their own plan link, without staff notes.

Use Build steps, the first section of the plan on the project's Plan & brief tab. It lists everything on the plan in the order to make it, and each step has a Make it button that opens the right aiKit tool already filled in from the plan: a missing page or tool opens the project's Assistant with the request written out, an admin system, client portal or dashboard opens the planner for a new linked part with the tools it needs, the brand voice opens Brand Voice for this project, blog posts open Content Kit, and going live opens Hosting. Nothing runs until you press Send or save in that tool. Steps check themselves off when aiKit sees the result (the page on the site, the part created, the voice saved, the site live); anything aiKit can't see you check off with one click. A Site Plan covers websites, admin systems, modules and related builds. A business tool that isn't built yet shows Coming next with Request this tool. For example, a tile studio's plan might show Add the About page, Add to the site: Book online, Build an admin system for its staff accounts, and Go live.

Open the Tool library and choose Site Plan. Its page first shows the plan every new website starts with, in the same layout your projects get. Press Example result to see a finished plan for an invented landscaping company, with Show the whole example to read all of it, plus how the plan works, what's included and who it's for. If you already have projects, pick one at the top of that page and press Open its site plan to go straight to that project's Plan & brief tab; with no projects yet, the same spot offers Start a project.

Sites whose files came in from another AI tool, an import or an upload never went through an aiKit build, so they had no written plan file and the plan editor used to say there was no plan. Now the editor starts one from the project brief, the kit picks and the pages it measured on the site, and shows This plan was started for you. Press Save this plan to make it the project's plan; after that every section can be edited like any other plan.

Add to plan always records the item on the project's brief and files a work item on the Feedback tab marked Waiting on us. You'll then find it in three places on the project: a Planned card on the Kit tab, a card in the site plan's Modules and tools section on the Plan & brief tab (with what it does for the business and a View in the Kit link back to its page), and a Planned badge in The original brief. Add and build now does both of those and then immediately sends that work item to the AI to build, using the same process as Fix with AI. It only appears once the project already has real files to edit, meaning the first build has finished or the site is live. Before that, there's nothing for the AI to build into, so only Add to plan is offered. If the project is set to review first, build-now waits instead of skipping the review: the pick and the work item are recorded, and the work item sits on the Feedback tab until someone presses Approve to work, like any other request under that setting. Either way you can follow the item from Waiting on us to done. Each ready website tool (online booking, quote requests, the contact form, lead capture, Send us your file, the quote builder, reviews) is set up for this project as it's added, not copied: it uses the business name, services, hours, service area, contact details and tone from the brief and the Client File, takes the site's own colors, and sits inside the site's header and footer. Anything that isn't on file, such as opening hours or a phone number, is never made up: the work item says in plain words what's missing, so you can add it to the Client File and ask for the tool to be updated. For example, a dog groomer's booking page lists Full groom and Nail trim from the Client File instead of sample services.

Everything you enter in an item's add panel is gathered into one message: the suggested customizations you tick, the layout variation showing in the working preview when you press Add (for example Shop layout: List), the option you pick if the item has named options, your own note under What should be different for you?, any photo or PDF you attach, and your answers under What we'll ask you. That message is saved in two places at once. It goes on the project's brief as that item's own note, so the plan stays an honest record of what was asked for. It also goes into the work item on the Feedback tab, so whoever builds it, the AI or a person, sees the whole request and not just the item's name. For example, adding online booking with the note "45-minute visits only, no Sundays, and ask for the address" carries all three details into the build.

Two ways, every time something changes. After each chat change, pin, Kit addition, restore, publish from another AI tool, or hand edit of the plan, aiKit measures the real site files: every page, its title, search description, sections, links, forms, pictures, and tools. That part is done by code, so it always matches the site. Then an AI pass rewrites only the parts of the written plan the change touched, without a changelog or dated notes. History on the Site plan screen is the record of changes. The screen shows Plan updated with the date and time. If the AI pass didn't finish, or the site has a newer version than the plan, a Refresh plan button appears and the page runs it once on its own. If it still doesn't go through, the reason is shown, and you can press it again or edit the plan by hand.

Yes, at their own link, aikit.ai/p/<project>/plan. Share with the client on the Site plan screen copies it. It's protected by the same access code they use to leave feedback, with no separate login. They see the progress band, a sitemap, their pages with View links, the site's tools, business facts, brand, decisions, open questions, and when the plan was last updated. They never see health issues, fix instructions, change history, who asked for what, or the file list. Anything you mark as internal is removed on the server before the page is sent, so it never reaches their browser: any line containing (internal), [internal], or (staff only), any line starting with Internal:, and any section headed Internal or Staff only. A Send feedback button opens their live site with feedback turned on, or their Recent updates page if the site isn't live yet.

Yes. On their site plan link, each built page has an Approve button. The client types their name, adds a note if they like, and approves. The approval is tied to that page's exact content. If the page changes afterward, it shows Changed since you approved and asks for approval again, so a later edit never slips through on an old approval. On your side, the Site plan shows Client approved or Changed since approval on every page, so you can see at a glance what's signed off. Only someone using the client's access code can approve. If you open the client link while signed in, you see the approval state without an Approve button, so nobody can approve on the client's behalf. For example, a client can approve Home and About this week, and Services once the photos are in.

Use Copy & improve, at aikit.ai/home/copy in the new layout or from the Copy & improve button on Projects. Pick a site you own, or type any web address you own or have permission to copy. aiKit makes a private copy and reviews it automatically. You get a checklist of concrete improvements, each with a plain reason: speed, phone layout, the headline and main button, missing contact, booking, or quote pages, trust, the search listing, and accessibility. Untick what you don't want, add your own changes, and press Apply. Then compare the original and the copy side by side, page by page. When you're happy, press Go live, which gives the copy its own new address. The original is never changed. It's a good way to show a prospective client what their current site could look like.

Use Import a site, at aikit.ai/home/import or the Import a site button on Projects. Type the address and press Find pages. aiKit lists the pages it found, with the first 50 ticked; untick any you don't need. Tick the box to confirm you own the site or may copy it, and press Import. aiKit opens every page in a real browser at computer and phone width, copies its words, pictures, fonts and colors, and connects its contact forms to your Requests inbox. Then it compares the copy with the original page by page and uses AI to fix what doesn't match. You get a match report with a score for every page and side-by-side and slider views. The copy stays private until you press Go live, and the original site is never changed.

Every page gets a match score out of 100, measured from full-length pictures of the original and the copy at computer and phone width, not from the AI's opinion. The score mixes how close the pictures are, where each separate spot that differs costs a little, with whether the same words, pictures, headings, fonts and colors are in the same places. Pages under 95 get up to two rounds of AI fixes, worst first. A fix is kept only if the page moved closer to the original and added no words or pictures the original doesn't have. Fonts licensed to one address, like Adobe Fonts, can't be copied, so the report says when the copy shows a similar font instead. For example, a simple site can score 100 on every page; a site with licensed fonts may stay in the 80s or 90s until the font account allows the new address.

Finding the pages, copying them, and comparing them uses no AI. Only the fixes for pages that don't match yet use AI, usually a few cents per page, and every import has a hard limit. Before you start, the screen shows an estimate, and when it's done, the report shows what it really used. Admins see both in dollars; everyone else sees tokens. The project's normal daily AI limit also applies, and if a limit is reached the import finishes with what it has and says so. Suggest improvements uses a small amount of AI once, and each idea you accept with Do this uses one AI edit, like any other change.

Only with the owner's permission. Before an import starts, you tick a box confirming you own the site or its owner said you may copy it, and you can add a note, such as "Owner approved by email on May 3". The confirmation and who gave it are saved with the project, and the import won't run without it. aiKit also follows the site's robots.txt: pages it asks robots not to copy are shown but can't be picked, and aiKit waits between pages so the site is never strained. The copy uses only the site's own words and pictures. Only public websites can be imported; private network addresses are refused.

Copying a site you own doesn't use an AI edit, and neither does the automatic review that writes the checklist of improvements; its use shows on the Usage page. Each change you apply uses one AI edit, and only when it actually goes through. A change that fails or changes nothing doesn't use one. So if you apply eight improvements and seven land, seven edits are used. Starting from a web address rather than a site you own runs the import-and-upgrade build, the same as "Replicate it exactly, then upgrade it" when you create a project. For an exact copy instead, use Import a site. You'll see the progress on the page while it runs. Before applying, read the checklist and untick anything you don't need. Fewer, well-chosen changes are usually better than applying everything at once, and every applied change is a version you can undo.

No. Every change is made on the copy, and the copy has no public address until you press Go live, which gives it its own new address. Your original site, and its domain, stay exactly as they were the whole time. That makes it safe to experiment. You can apply improvements, compare the two side by side page by page, undo anything you don't like through Versions, and only publish when you're sure. Even after the copy goes live at its own address, customers who visit your original address keep seeing the original site. The copy is a separate project with its own Versions, Requests, and Hosting tab, so you decide what happens next with each one.

The Next steps card on a project's Overview tab is a plain, rule-based reading of that project's real state. There's no AI behind it, so the same facts always produce the same suggestions, ranked Now, Soon, and Later. It looks at things like no goal on file, discovery questions never sent, nothing built yet, a live site with no tools, a site still on a temporary address, feedback waiting, or open questions in the plan. Each row has a button that takes you straight to the fix: the Questions tab, Go live, the Kit, or a specific view of the editor window, sometimes with the request already typed in for you. None of it is required. It's a suggestion list, not a gate. When nothing is worth flagging, the card simply says so instead of inventing something to show.

Use Clients in the sidebar. Each client is a card with all of their sites, each marked Live, Not live yet, or Draft, a picture of each homepage, and a count of what needs you. Search and filters (Needs you, Has a live site, Has a draft, No sites yet) narrow the list, and the counts across the top are filters too. Open a client to see everything waiting on their sites, all their sites, a summary of their Brief & rules, and who has access. You can also start a new site already linked to them from there. Once you have two or more clients, the Working on menu in the sidebar narrows Home and Projects to one client at a time; choose All clients to see everything again. For example, an agency can focus on one client during a review call without other clients' work in view.

Yes. On a client's page, press One change, all N sites, or open One change, many sites from Clients. Every site of that client is already ticked. Untick any you want to leave alone, or tick sites from other clients too. Press Describe the change, write it once, and start it. aiKit edits the sites one at a time on its own server, each as its own edit with its own version you can undo, so it uses one AI edit per site. Live sites get a draft, not a live change: you see each site's before and after on the run page and publish one by one or all at once. Sites where you're only a reviewer aren't offered for picking, since reviewers don't start AI edits. For example, a business with five location sites can update a new phone number on all of them, check them, and publish in one go.

A reviewer can open a site and see its requests, feedback, versions, Brief & rules, and site plan, leave pins and replies, and approve a finished fix or send it back. A reviewer never starts an AI edit, builds, restores a version, changes settings, adds people, or publishes, and never sees the client's access code. aiKit enforces this on its servers for every action. To add a reviewer to one site, open Team access on that site and pick Reviewer: view, comment, approve. To give someone every site of one client, including sites added later, the client's owner opens the client's page, goes to People with access, enters the email of their aiKit account, picks Can edit and publish or Reviewer, and presses Give access. Remove access takes it away from all that client's sites at once. The person needs their own free aiKit account first, and aiKit doesn't send them an email for you.

Yes, right away. The moment a customer sends a quote request, quote builder, booking, contact message, lead, or file, the project's owner and staff get a notification on the bell at the top of aiKit, and by email if they choose, with the customer's details and a link straight to that one request. Replying to the email answers the customer directly, and the email has one-tap Email and Call buttons for phones. Bookings within a day and a half and messages that say urgent, today, or ASAP are marked Urgent. Reviewers on a project don't get these unless they turn them on, and test sends from Check it works never notify anyone. Choose how each kind of update reaches you in Settings → Notifications: right away, one daily summary, in aiKit only, or off.

Yes. On the project's Questions page, the Due date and reminders card lets you set a due date, the client's email, how often to remind (every 1 to 7 days) and how many reminders at most. Each reminder lists the exact questions still open, the last one lands the day before the due date, replies go to the project owner, and reminders stop by themselves once everything is answered. When the client finishes a round, you get a Client answers notification. Reminders are sent by email, so they start once email is switched on for aiKit; until then the card says so and your schedule is saved.

In Settings → Notifications every kind of update has its own answers. Most let you get an email right away, one email a day, the bell only, or nothing. Some have answers made for them: website forms can send only quotes and bookings right away and the rest in a daily email; Hub comments and updates (new projects, boards, messages, comments and replies) come right away by default and can switch to a daily summary or a weekly roundup on Mondays; Hub due reminders let you pick the day before, on the day, or only when late, with an Also email me switch; quote follow-ups can repeat every 3 days until the customer answers. Quiet hours hold right-away emails from 9 p.m. to 7 a.m. your time for the morning summary (urgent ones still come). The bell shows only your own notifications, and each one opens the exact record it's about.

Yes. aiKit Printer’s Helper runs on your account's tokens, and a free account comes with a monthly amount, with no credit card and no website needed. It's built for designers, print shops, promo companies, agencies, and business owners: anyone making a file that has to be exactly right, whether it goes to a printer or gets used somewhere else. Here's how it works. Sign in, open Printer’s Helper (from the Tool library, a kit, or aikit.ai/tools/printers-helper), drop in a file, and say what the job needs the way you'd tell a prepress tech: "add bleed to this business card" or "check this flyer before it goes to press." You get back a proof, a print-ready file, a list of what was changed, and a plain-language file check. Each job includes 5 follow-up changes to the same piece. The Print & promo starter kit on Home puts Printer’s Helper, customer proofs, and quote requests in one kit in a click.

It's the same tool with a new name: Printer’s Helper (October 2026). Your jobs, customers, shop profile and allowance are all still there. It now lives at aikit.ai/tools/printers-helper, and the old addresses (/tools/printers-helper and /tools/print-proof) still open it, so saved links and links in emails keep working.

As one organized list, in the same order as the pages of your original file. When a version makes more than two files (for example a 26-page PDF split into 26 single-page posters, each with its own bleed, or a set of two-sided postcards), the version shows every file as a numbered card: a picture of the file, its full file name with the part that tells it apart in bold, its size, its own check result (Passed, Needs a look, or Must fix, with what was found written on the card), a box to select it, and its own download. Two-sided pieces show the Front and Back side by side under the piece's name, so a front never gets mixed up with another card's back. The header stays in view while you scroll and shows the count ("26 files, all passed" or "1 must fix, 1 needs a look, 24 passed"), Download all (one ZIP of every print file plus the combined proof), and Combined proof (every file in one PDF to look over or send). Filters show All, Needs a look, or Passed, and Find a file narrows a long list by name. Tap any picture to open it large in the full-screen viewer, with zoom, Previous and Next, the file name always in view, Show back or Show front on a two-sided piece, and Download for that file; the arrow keys also step through the files, and the open file is in the page's address, so the link opens straight to it. If a very long file didn't finish in one run, the list says which pages are left, with a Continue where it stopped button that finishes them. A version with one or two files keeps the usual single proof view.

Yes. Tap the proof picture (or View large above it) and the version opens full screen as the clean art: the print-ready PDF itself, drawn in your browser, with no cut line, safe-area dashes, bleed shading, or labels. Zoom with the + and − buttons, Fit, 100% (the printed size on your screen), or 200%; with a mouse wheel, a trackpad pinch, or two fingers on a phone; or double-click or double-tap a spot to zoom straight to it. Drag to move around, and the PDF is drawn again, sharper, as you zoom. When you want to check placement, turn on Show trim & safe lines to draw the red cut line, the blue dashed safe area, and the shaded bleed over the art; it starts off. Previous version and Next version (or the left and right arrow keys) step through the versions without closing the viewer, and Esc closes it. For example, on a business card you can zoom to 200% on the phone number to check the small type, then switch the lines on to see that it sits inside the safe area. The same viewer opens a single file of a version that made many files.

Press Download all beside the proof (or in the Compare all versions list, next to the Showing menu of versions). You get one ZIP with each version's print-ready PDF and a proof PNG, named by job and version, such as business-card-v01-print.pdf, business-card-v01-proof.png, business-card-v02-print.pdf, and so on. The proof PNG is a smaller picture of the art, 1,600 pixels on its long side, made from the print-ready PDF with no proof lines, labels, or logo, so it is easy to email or post as the proof. A version that made many print files (a long PDF split into one poster per page) keeps each file's own name after the version, so nothing gets mixed up. Each version also has its own Download print-ready PDF and Download proof (PNG), beside the proof, in the Every version list, and under its line in the conversation (which opens it large when tapped), and each file card of a many-file version has its own proof PNG button. If a file can't be added to the ZIP, the download still finishes, with a short note inside naming the missing file so you can download it on its own. Only you can download your jobs' files.

It pauses, and nothing made so far is lost. Each turn has a few minutes to work; a big job, like splitting a long PDF into one file per page, can run past that. The conversation then says "This took longer than 3 minutes, so I paused. Everything made so far is saved." with a Continue where it stopped button. Press it and the assistant picks up the pages that were left and finishes them, gathering a split's pages into one version rather than one version per page. Typing continue in the change box does the same thing.

Designers use it every day, and it isn't only for printing. Printer’s Helper is a way to make files that are ready to use: start a new piece from a logo and words (business cards, notepads, labels, signs, menus, and more), set up a blank template at an exact size with bleed and safe lines, resize or convert a file, change it to one color or black only, or check it before it goes anywhere. You say what you need in plain words, like "make a 5.5 x 8.5 notepad from this logo" or "resize this postcard to 6 x 9," and you get a version with a proof and the file, plus copies such as JPG, PNG, TIFF, or PDF/X-4 when that version can make them. Changes to the same job make new versions, so you can compare and go back. Print shops use the same tool to fix customer files and send proofs for approval.

In Printer’s Helper, drop the file in and type "add bleed to this business card," or pick Fix or edit a file I have, add the file, and tap the Add 1/8 in bleed suggestion (it fills the box, so you can change the words). Printer’s Helper measures the file, extends the art's own edge out past the cut by the bleed your printer uses, and sets the print boxes. It never redraws or stretches the art itself. The result shows a short animation of the art running out into the bleed, then a proof with the shaded bleed, the red cut line, and the blue dashed safe area. The bleed amount comes from the printer you choose under Printing with: our standard product line, the industry standard of 1/8 inch, or your own saved printer. Change it in plain words at any time, such as "use 1/16 in bleed instead," and you get a new version with the old one still in the job.

No, it never redraws the art. aiKit's AI understands your request and picks the steps, but every change to the file is an exact, repeatable print operation: extending edges into the bleed, scaling evenly into the safe area, cropping to the trim, resizing, lining up folds, or setting print boxes. That means the logo, photos, and words in your customer's design stay exactly as they were. What changes is how the file sits on the page for printing. Problems that would need judgment are reported, not quietly fixed. Low-resolution images and RGB color show up in the file check with what was measured and how to fix it. A photo that's too low in resolution for its print size is flagged and offered a real fix you choose, Improve the resolution: it looks for a sharper copy of the same picture already in the job, then for vector art to draw again at full size (AI upscaling is not turned on yet). Only when nothing works does it say what it tried, and you can accept it as is or send your customer a drafted note.

Under the main box, Printer’s Helper lists what it does as one set of choices. Prepress: fix or edit a file you have (bleed, fit to size, safe area, crop marks, folds), start a new file for any product, check a file before printing with a detailed report, make a proof for your customer, signs, stickers, and die-cuts, and make a template. Convert or clean up a file: convert, combine or split pages, resize, colors (one color or black only), reduce file size, and clean up imposed or crop-marked files. Design something simple (Basic design): every product in our line, grouped as Cards, Stationery, Forms, Labels & stickers, Tickets, Marketing, Folders, Signs & banners, and Booklets, built from your logo and words or set up from finished art. Make a template: the Template Creator. Each task card opens its own page that leads with a prompt box, a place for the file, and suggestions that fill the box, with the optional settings folded away; or describe anything in your own words in the main box. When a request is outside what it does, it says so plainly instead of guessing.

Every Printer’s Helper task page and product page, and the Send proof window, have a Customer field that searches your Clients list as you type (by name, company, email, or phone). Pick one, or choose Add a customer to save a new one right there with their name, email, phone, and company. The customer is saved to Clients, so next time their email fills the To line of the proof on its own. Their jobs and proofs then show on their client page under Print jobs & proofs, each one a link that opens it, and New job on that card opens Printer’s Helper with that customer already picked.

Yes. Make a proof for my customer has choices you can combine, folded under Proof options (they start on the front only, or front and back for a two-page file, with the proof and a screen picture, so most proofs need no choices at all). Sides on the proof: Front, Back, or both (both go side by side on one proof page); for brochures, menus, and folders it's Outside and Inside, and an NCR form or a multi-page file simply shows every part or page. What your customer gets: Proof to approve (a PDF with the cut and safe lines), Print-ready file (the PDF with bleed), Email-size copy, and File check report. Proof picture: Screen picture (opens fast on any phone), 300 dpi picture (sharp when zoomed in close), or both. Your picks are kept with the job, so Send proof attaches those files for you and the customer's page shows the picture you chose.

Yes. In Printer’s Helper, pick Design something simple under the main box and pick the product: business cards, postcards, rack cards, letterhead, envelopes (#10, #9, 6 x 9, A7, A6, A2, A9), notepads, NCR or carbonless forms (2, 3, or 4 parts, numbered, red numbers standard), labels and stickers (circle, rectangle, square, rounded corners, oval, or a custom die cut), tickets and raffle tickets, certificates, table tents, door hangers, menus, presentation folders, brochures (every fold type), signs and banners, and catalogs and booklets. The panel asks for the size (standard sizes, or Other with width and height), the product's options, your words, and your logo. Many products show three styles side by side, Classic, Modern, and Bold; business cards show ten layouts, each pictured front and back (for example Clean left, Logo front, Vertical, Split block, and Monogram), letterhead and #10 envelopes show seven matching layouts, full-color flyers up to six photo-led layouts chosen for your words and photos, rack cards six, postcards five, notepads nine, and NCR forms come from industry templates in three layouts, so you pick the one you like. Basic design makes clean, professional layouts from your logo and words, not fully custom art. Custom creative design is coming soon with DesignContest.ai.

Yes. On a full-color flyer made in Printer’s Helper, press Edit words and photos on the version. You can change every line (headline, subhead, points, offer, call to action, contact lines, event date), replace, remove, or reorder photos, tap a photo to mark the part that must stay in view, and switch to another layout. Save makes the next version with a new proof and file check. No AI is used for this, so it doesn't use a job or any token. Prices for the Price list layout and words for the Customer quote layout come only from you; the assistant never writes them. For example, a made-up garden center could swap its main photo, change "Spring sale" to "Grow something new," and have the new proof in a few seconds.

Printer’s Helper makes the first version in a layout built for type and color, and never drops in a photo you didn't choose. Press Choose photos and you'll see 8 to 12 free stock photos picked for your business and the services on the flyer, each checked to be sharp enough to print and free of readable words, signs or logos. Tap the ones you like, press Use, and save: the flyer switches to a photo layout with a new proof. For example, a made-up lawn care company would see freshly mowed lawns in front of homes, not a garden bed with a sign. Where an image service is set up, you can also make an image with AI; its cost is shown before it runs.

Yes. Product panels ask How will this print?: Full color (CMYK) or PMS spot colors, with a box for up to four PMS colors, such as 286 C and Black. Forms and notepads ask for the ink instead: black or one PMS color. The Colors card in File tech has fuller control: how many colors (1 to 4), a box for each, and Suggest from my logo, which proposes the nearest PMS colors for you to confirm. If you skip it, the assistant asks when the answer matters, with the same boxes. A job that prints in PMS colors shows a Plates tab with each separation as its own grayscale picture, and its downloads include a separated plates PDF with one page per plate. The file check flags any stray CMYK or RGB color. Screen colors are only a preview; the plate name is what the press uses. Spot plates are made from vector art, not photos.

Yes. In an open job, use Add files in the box under the conversation, drag files anywhere onto the conversation, paste a picture, or on a phone use Take a photo. The files join the same job, show on your message, and can be sent with or without words. Printer’s Helper reads PDF, AI saved with PDF compatibility, EPS, SVG, Word, PowerPoint, Publisher, CorelDRAW, OpenDocument, TIFF, flattened PSD, PNG, JPG, iPhone HEIC, AVIF, WebP, GIF, and BMP, up to 60 MB each. Everything except PDF, PNG, and JPG becomes a PDF when it arrives; a converted Word, PowerPoint, Publisher, or CorelDRAW file is noted in the file check, since fonts and layout can shift. InDesign, Affinity, Sketch, Figma, Canva, Pages, Keynote, camera RAW, and ZIP files get a note on exactly how to export a PDF or JPG. A file that isn't usable, such as one that's password-protected or damaged, says why on its chip and stays out of the job. Every file you upload stays listed under Files in this job, with a picture, its size, and a Download link, even if the message it came with didn't go through; those files are ticked to go with your next message, so you never add them twice.

An Illustrator (.ai) file saved with Create PDF Compatible File turned off holds no artwork other programs can read. Opened anywhere but Illustrator, it shows only a notice page asking you to save the file with PDF content. Printer’s Helper spots that notice and stops before making anything, so the file never becomes a proof of the notice, and the job isn't counted against your month. To fix it, open the file in Illustrator, choose Save As, tick Create PDF Compatible File in the Illustrator Options, and add the file to the job again. Exporting a PDF from Illustrator works too. If the file came from a customer who doesn't have Illustrator handy, ask them for a PDF export or the original logo in another format, such as EPS or SVG.

No. If none of the files you start a job with are usable, for example because they're password-protected, damaged, saved without PDF content, or a type Printer’s Helper doesn't read, or if an upload doesn't go through on aiKit's side, nothing is sent to the assistant, so no tokens are used. The empty job is removed. Each file's chip says what to fix. If the assistant stops before making a first version, sending your request again picks up where it left off. So it's safe to drop in a file just to see whether it's usable. Tokens go to the AI work the assistant actually does on your job.

Yes. Use as a starting point, in the menu of any job or version, makes a new job for the product you pick: envelopes, letterhead, business cards, notepads, NCR forms, labels, postcards, presentation folders, and more, or type one under Something else. If the job has several versions, choose which one to carry from. The new job carries the same logo files, words, colors, and printer, with a Made from link back to the original. The assistant builds it and asks only what's missing. For example, a finished letterhead for a made-up company like Harbor Line Print Co. can become a matching #10 envelope and business card in minutes. Duplicate makes a plain copy for the same product, with the chosen version carried over unchanged. Either way, the new job uses your tokens like any other job, and it keeps the old job's customer and folder.

Printer’s Helper keeps every job in a workspace: Your jobs runs down the left side (a sheet from the bottom on a phone), and there's a full All jobs page. Search by job name, customer, file name, product, or note. Filter by kind of work, product, where it stands, the customer's answer, customer, folder, and date, then sort and group by customer, folder, or date. Counts across the top, such as Needs answer, Ready to send, Waiting, Changes, Approved, and Pinned, are filters too, and a Showing bar with Show all clears them. Add a customer name to any job, make your own folders, pin important jobs to the top, and archive finished ones to keep the list tidy. Every job and every filtered view has its own link you can bookmark or share with a teammate on the same account.

Nothing is made yet, and the same goes for a few words that don't say what to do, like "fix this" or "make it work". The assistant looks at the file first, then tells you in plain words what it seems to be and what it plans to do, with the size and printer spec it would use, and asks before it starts. Tap Yes, go ahead to have it do that plan, pick another choice such as Only check it, or type what you want instead. No version is made and no change is counted until you answer.

One request is always one version. After every change, Printer’s Helper checks the file and looks at the proof against your words, and if it finds something it can fix (bleed, the safe area, a color that slipped in), it fixes it right away. That fix keeps the same version number and takes the place of the first pass, so asking for one color change gives you one new version, never two. The new proof shows in the same place as the old one, and the earlier versions stay one pick away in the Showing menu.

Yes. Under Ask for a change, press Save my own quick change, give it a short button name (like Our house bleed) and write in What it should do as much detail as you need, such as "Add 1/8 in bleed on every side, keep all words 1/4 in inside the cut, and convert the colors to CMYK for our press." The button then shows on every job under My quick changes, and pressing it sends the full instructions, exactly as if you had typed them. The pencil beside a button edits it or removes it. Your quick changes are saved to your account, so they follow you to any computer or phone.

Not right away. The version on screen is part of the page address, so Back steps to the version you were looking at before (and closes the large viewer if it's open), one step at a time. Only after the first version does Back leave the job. You can also copy the address to share or bookmark a particular version.

Every version made for printing has Download print file right over the proof (the one filled button on the card), with Proof (PDF) beside it and All files, which opens All files and formats under it. A two-sided piece (two pages, such as a postcard) gets Download print files over the proof (both sides and the combined PDF in one ZIP), and beside the proof Download front and Download back, one print-ready PDF per side for printers such as 4over that take each side as its own file, each with every PDF box at the full size including bleed and named like job_front_4.125x6.125_bleed.pdf, plus Download all (both sides, ZIP) with the front, the back, and the combined PDF. Download proof sheet (PDF) is always its own download. The Proof is for your customer, with cut and safe lines marked. The Print-ready PDF is for the printer, with the exact size, bleed, and print boxes. Numbered or personalized pieces, such as NCR forms and tickets, also get an FPO file (for position only) that shows your printer where the numbers or names print. View full report downloads the file check as a PDF. All download formats lists everything else, with what each is for: a separated plates PDF for PMS jobs, the 300 dpi proof picture, cut, fold, and template files when a job has them, and the formats that can be made correctly for that version, such as PDF/X-4, JPG or PNG at 150, 300, or 600 dpi, TIFF (CMYK at 300 dpi), SVG for layouts built in Printer’s Helper, and a ZIP of everything. Press Make it to build one on the spot. A File tech version has the file it made.

FPO stands for "for position only." It's a copy of the print file with a labeled overlay that shows your printer where things go: numbering boxes on NCR forms and tickets, die and cut lines, perforations, folds and scores, holes, grommets, pole pockets, envelope windows, and areas that change from piece to piece. It's for the printer to read, never to print. Sending it with the print-ready file removes guesswork. For example, on a 3-part numbered NCR form, the FPO shows exactly where the numbers fall, so nobody has to ask. Printer’s Helper shows the FPO only for pieces that need one: NCR forms and tickets, which are numbered by the press, and any piece you ask to be numbered, sequential, personalized, or variable (for example, "number these door hangers from 500"). A business card, flyer, or postcard has nothing for the press to add, so it gets no FPO. Blank templates and file work, such as converting or combining pages, have none either.

Open Printer’s Helper, choose Start a new file, and pick NCR / carbonless forms or Notepads. The product opens on its own page with a box for your words and a guide under it. For NCR forms, tap the form template for your kind of business, shown as pictures (general invoice; HVAC, plumbing, or electrical work order; estimate or quote; delivery receipt or bill of lading; auto repair order; lawn and landscaping; cleaning service; restaurant guest check; rental agreement; inspection checklist; or sales receipt), each with that trade's fields, checklist, table, terms, and signature lines; 2, 3, or 4 parts with their paper colors (white, canary, pink, goldenrod), red or black numbers and the first number, padded sets, books with wrap-around covers, or loose sets, and the quantity. For notepads, type your business name, phone, address, and any more lines (Add another line), add a logo if you want one (from a file, Logo Kit, or the Graphics Library), and tap the size and ink; lines, sheets, paper, and quantity are already set to the usual under More choices. A sketch beside the guide redraws as you pick. The first notepad comes in nine layouts shown as pictures of the pad (Centered with or without lines, Soft footer, Thin frame with or without lines, Watermark, Left aligned, Minimal corner, From the desk of or Wide margins), or describe your own; the first NCR form comes in three layouts (Solid bars, Clean lines, Shaded boxes). Pick one, then ask for any field, column, or terms change on a form. On a notepad, switch the font (Serif, Sans, Condensed), the layout, or Lined and Blank with one tap, or use Request a change for anything else. Then press Make the NCR / carbonless form or Make the notepad: your words and a short order list of your picks go to the assistant, and you get a proof, a print-ready PDF, and, for NCR forms, an FPO file that shows your printer where the numbers print. One and two color pads and NCR forms are set up with no bleed and the glued edge kept clear; full color pads print to the edge, with 1/16 in bleed.

Each job includes 5 changes to the same piece, and the page shows how many are left. A version that comes back Not done yet never counts, and neither does a fix the assistant makes on its own. Before a sixth change you're asked first: continuing starts a new job with 5 more changes. A new job also starts for a new piece (new artwork, a different product or size, or a different business; you're asked first and can say it's a revision), or for a change more than 30 days after the job's first version. Every change uses your account's tokens.

Yes. Every product page has Use your printer's template instead, under Print settings. Add the template from the printer you'll send the job to, as a PDF, AI saved as PDF, EPS, SVG, TIFF, PNG, or JPG, and Printer’s Helper measures its bleed, cut, safe, and fold lines and uses them instead of our product line's numbers. Print settings then says the numbers come from your template, so you always know where they came from. If a template doesn't measure cleanly, for example because its lines are faint or unlabeled, the assistant asks you for the numbers rather than guessing. This is especially handy for unusual products, like a custom die-cut folder or a trade printer's specific envelope layout, where standard sizes won't match exactly. For printers you use often, save their bleed and safe area under Printing with, then My printer.

Yes. Make a template, under the main box in Printer’s Helper, opens the Template Creator. Start from one of our products to fill in its numbers, or use a custom size. Then set the size, bleed, safe area, folds (none, half, tri-fold, z-fold, gate, roll, or accordion), die shape and corner radius, holes, numbering areas, grommets or pole pockets, pockets, and notes. Press Make the template. A printing-expert assistant checks your specs, asks for anything missing one question at a time, and makes a labeled template PDF, with the die line as its own file when the piece is cut to a shape. On the right, Ready-made templates lists every product in our line in each of its sizes; pick one and press Make it. Any template can be changed afterward in words, such as "make the safe area 1/4 in," and each change is a new version.

Yes. Proof from (For, in the main box) picks which company the job is for, before it starts: it is next to Printing with in the main box, right under the box on every product page, and on the task pages such as Make a proof for my customer. It lists your Shop profile and every company you set up (the same list as Quote from in Quotes), with the logo that will print, and + Add a company… adds one with its logo, phone, email, website, and address; Edit (the company)'s details… changes them. Set one as Default for new jobs and new jobs start with it; with companies and no default, the start asks you to pick. If your words, the customer, or a file name mention another of your companies, the start asks which one the proof is from. The job's proof sheet, the customer's proof page, the Send proof drawer, and the approval email all carry that company's name, contact lines, and logo. A company with no logo shows its name in text and never another company's logo. Change it later on the job under Send to your customer (Proof from): the proof is drawn again right away with the new company, with no AI and no change to the print file. For example, a shop that also runs a quick-print counter can start a business card job For the counter's company and the customer only ever sees that name.

Yes. In Printer’s Helper, open Shop profile at the top right (it reads Set up your shop until you've set it up; on a phone it is at the bottom of the page). Add your logo as a PNG or JPG up to 2 MB; a wide logo on a white or clear background looks best. Then fill in your company name, address, phone, email, and website, and choose what you are: Print shop, Agency, Designer, or Business owner. A preview labeled Your customer sees shows how the top of the customer's proof page will look, updating as you type. Press Save profile. From then on, your logo and details appear on every proof page you send, and every new job carries them onto its proof sheets and reports. Your company name is also used as your shop name on proofs. Customers see a proof that looks like it came from your shop, because it did. Crop marks and color bars on print files and proofs is off to start: files come out at their exact sheet size, the way automated printing lines want them. Tick it only if your printer asks for them.

It's the log of everything that ran for a version, written from the steps themselves rather than the assistant's own words, with the time of each. In order: what you asked, any question the assistant asked and your answer, every step with its real result (the spec it looked up, the bleed it added and how, a resize with its percentage, each photo's ppi before and after), the file check with its counts and each warning, the proof, any step that didn't finish and why (a timeout, for example), and the files saved with their sizes. The assistant's summary shows last, marked as its words. A job over many pages shows one line such as Pages 1 to 26: split into its own file, with Show all 26 pages. Open it under the result, below the next steps.

Printer’s Helper works through real fixes for every photo under the product's resolution and stops at the first that works. First it looks for a sharper copy of the same picture already in the job: elsewhere in the file, in the customer's other uploads, or in an earlier version, matched by what the picture shows. Then it looks for vector art of it among your files and draws it again at full size. AI upscaling would come next but is not turned on yet. When a fix works, you get a new version with the photo replaced in place, the ppi measured again, a close-up before and after, and the report shows the check before and after. When nothing works, no version is made and the chat says what it tried; then you can accept it as is or send your customer the drafted note from the report. Nothing is ever sent to your customer by aiKit.

In Printer’s Helper, pick Check my file before printing and add the file. Optionally choose what it prints as, the product and size, so the file is held to that product's exact bleed and safe area; otherwise the size is measured from the file. The result shows a one-line summary, such as "6 of 7 checks look good; 1 needs a look," and View full report. The report lists every check, most important first, each marked Looks good, Worth a look, or Must fix, with what was measured, the rule it must meet, where on the page it is (in inches from the top left), and how to fix it. Findings a tool can fix have a button named for the fix (such as Extend the edges into the bleed or Improve the resolution) that makes it as a new version, checked again with a before and after. Any finding can be marked Accept as is, and ones only your customer can fix offer Draft a note to the customer, a message you edit and send yourself. Download report saves it all as a PDF, which is handy to send to a customer when their file needs changes.

On showcase products that offer it, yes. Presentation folders, brochures, catalog and booklet covers, door hangers, rack cards, postcards, flyers, table tents, signs and banners, and certificates open with a first choice: Simple or More creative. Simple builds clean, professional layouts from your logo, words, shapes, and type, in Classic, Modern, or Bold, or all three side by side. More creative asks for a direction: mood words (such as Bold, Elegant, or Warm), a few words describing the look, colors from your logo or chosen by you, a reference image of a design you like (for the feel, never copied), and your own photos. The assistant then adds an art layer under your words and logo, which stay sharp on top. Only your words are used, and the art is checked for print resolution and bleed before the file is print-ready. Notepads and NCR forms stay simple. Fully custom art is coming soon with DesignContest.ai.

Printer’s Helper gets files ready for print and builds clean layouts from your logo and words. It isn't for creating new logos or fully custom art from scratch; that's coming soon with DesignContest.ai. It isn't for rewriting the words or swapping the photos inside a customer's finished design, since it never redraws their art. And it isn't for pricing or ordering: it makes the files, not the order. If your website needs to take print orders or quote requests, that's a separate tool. Add quote requests or the quote builder to your aiKit site from the Tool library, and requests land on the project's Requests tab. Every tool, product, and kind of work in Printer’s Helper has an About panel that says what it's for, what it's not for, and its limits. The Help Center guide About Printer’s Helper collects them all.

It can misread a file, for example by taking a faint line for a cut line, so always look at the proof before you print. It uses only your words, and never writes a headline, price, or phone number for you. Simple layouts have no art layers. More creative, on the products that offer it, adds an art layer, and every art layer is checked for print resolution and bleed before the file is print-ready. Photos aren't split into PMS spot plates. A low-resolution image is never quietly changed: it's reported in the file check with Improve the resolution, which uses a sharper copy or vector art already in the job (AI upscaling is not turned on yet). A custom die cut traced around art is approximate, and large signs and banners are judged at viewing distance. Each result has a thumbs up and a thumbs down. Thumbs down asks what went wrong, and Send and fix it makes the next version from your report; every thumbs down reaches aiKit's team and is rechecked after updates. The About panel in Printer’s Helper and the Help Center guide About Printer’s Helper list the limits for each product.

Yes, and much more than bleed. In Printer’s Helper, choose Printing with, then Add printer. Start from the industry standard (or blank, or a copy of another printer), pick the kinds of products you send that printer (Notepads & forms, Cardstock / cover, Text weight, Large format, Labels & stickers, Envelopes, Booklets, Signs, or your own class), and change only the numbers that differ: bleed, safe area, gripper edge and size, lowest picture resolution, CMYK, spot or black only, rich black, total ink limit, thinnest line, smallest text, file type, crop marks, stocks, finishing, and house rules the assistant follows word for word. Each class can have its own rules and its own templates. Printers belong to your team, you can save many, mark one as the default, duplicate, export, and import them. Every version made with a printer shows the rules it was made to, and the proof lists them.

A gripper margin is the strip along one edge where a small offset press holds the sheet, so nothing prints there. It matters most on 1 and 2 color notepads, NCR forms, and other forms, where it is usually 1/4 to 3/8 in on the lead (often top) edge; printers differ. In Printer’s Helper, set it once on your printer under Printing with, Add printer, on the Notepads & forms class (or any class). Notepads and NCR forms are then built with that strip empty, the file check fails any art that lands in it and says how far to move it, and the proof shades the strip, labels it GRIPPER: NO ART, and starts the safe line past it. The Industry standards panel explains the gripper alongside the padding glue edge, numbering, and perforation.

Yes. When you ask for a custom die cut, a shaped sticker, a pocket folder, a box, or another special shape, the assistant asks for your template before it builds, at no cost. Upload your template or die line opens a drop zone right in the conversation (when your printer already has a template for that product, Use it from your printer comes first): PDF, AI, EPS, SVG, PNG, or JPG, with the cut line in red or magenta (DXF is coming soon). The template is measured, the die line is made from its cut line as its own 1 pt file, and the version and proof say Built on your template. Tick Save this template to your printer for next time and it is kept under that printer's product class (up to 4 MB), so the next job offers it by name. You can also add templates ahead of time under Printing with, Edit a printer, Templates. If you have no template, Use a standard shape builds a clean standard shape and marks it Shape assumed on the proof until you confirm.

Press Send proof on the job in All jobs (or Send version N on the version in Printer’s Helper). A drawer opens right there: pick the version, the customer, and who gets it (To, CC, and BCC, each person with their own private link), a subject and note from a template, files to attach such as the print-ready PDF, and how they approve. You see the exact email before it goes, then press Send or Copy link. Your customer opens their link on a phone or computer with no account and sees your logo and shop name, the proof with zoom, pages, and a compare with the last version, can pin comments on the exact spot, and approves by ticking the checklist and the approval box and typing their name, or asks for changes. Their answer shows on the job with who and when, the job's row tracks Sent, Opened, Viewed, and Approved, and aiKit emails you. Sending a newer version goes to the same people and opens a new round.

Yes, in two ways you can see. First, when you tell it something that holds for later jobs, such as "my printer wants 1/8 in bleed" or a customer's PMS colors, it uses it on that job and shows a card: Remember this for your next jobs? Tap Remember it, and it's used on your next jobs, and the assistant says when it's using it. Second, when results need fixing, the pattern can become a proposed house rule. aiKit's team reviews and approves every house rule before the assistant follows it for every shop. Each result also has a thumbs up and a thumbs down; thumbs down asks what went wrong (pick any, plus your words), and Send and fix it makes the next version from that. Every thumbs down reaches aiKit's team and goes into a test bank that is rechecked after updates. You stay in control: What aiKit remembers, at the top right of Printer’s Helper, lists everything kept for your account, and you can change or delete any of it.

Only what you said yes to. That covers your printer's numbers (bleed, safe area, stock), brand kits for each customer (inks, fonts, company lines), and how you like the work done, such as "always add crop marks on proofs." Open What aiKit remembers at the top right of Printer’s Helper to see the whole list. You can change any item's words, change which customer it's for, or delete it. A deleted item is gone for good and won't be used again. The list is private to your account and only used on your own jobs. For example, if you saved a customer's PMS colors for their business cards and they later rebrand, update the colors in the list, and every new job for that customer uses the new ones.

No. House rules, the lessons the assistant follows for every shop, are written to be general. Before a rule is even proposed, names, emails, phone numbers, web addresses, and street addresses are removed, and aiKit's team reviews every word before approving it. Files and proofs are never part of it. The rules come only from the words people write when something went wrong and from which file checks failed. For example, if several shops report that a certain kind of fold was set up wrong, the rule might describe the correct fold setup, without anyone's customer, artwork, or job details in it. What's remembered for your own account, such as your printer's numbers or a customer's brand colors, stays private to your account and is only used on your jobs.

Only when you press Send in the Send proof drawer, and only to the addresses you put on its To, CC, and BCC lines. Each gets a Proof to review email with your shop name or logo, your note, and their own link; their replies go to you. Copy link emails nobody: you share the link yourself. Until email is set up for your account, nothing is emailed at all, and the drawer says so. aiKit never markets to your customers, never quotes them, and never adds them to any list. Customer proof pages are hidden from search engines, never show vendor names, your costs, or other customers' jobs, and offer the print-ready file only if you chose to attach it. Job files are kept for one year. If you delete a job, its files are removed for good and the customer's link stops working.

Yes. In All jobs, open Ready to send, tick the proofs (or Select all), and press Send selected. The jobs are grouped by customer; add each customer's To addresses (and CC if you like), one note, and an answer-by date. Each person gets one email per customer listing each of their proofs, and every proof keeps its own private link, so each answer lands on the right job with a name on it. For a single proof, the Send proof drawer has To, CC, and BCC lines: To people approve by default, CC people can comment and everyone sees they're on it, and BCC people just see it, hidden from everyone else.

A job is one piece of print work for one product, along with the changes you ask for on it. For example, a business card for one person, with three rounds of tweaks, is one job. New artwork is a new job. If you add a file that isn't a new version of the job's art, Printer’s Helper asks whether to start a new job or keep it as a revision. A different product or size is a new job too, and it asks the same way. If the assistant notices a request is for a different piece, such as another business, different wording, or another product, it asks too. Each job includes 5 changes to the same piece. When those are used, you're told before the next change, which then starts a new job with 5 more. A job closes 30 days after its first version, and a change after that reopens it as a new job.

Each job uses your account's tokens, the same tokens every aiKit AI tool uses. There is no separate monthly job count. Files that weren't usable are never sent to the assistant, so they use nothing. The line at the bottom of Printer’s Helper says Uses your tokens and shows how many are left. Your tokens renew each month on your account's renewal day, and the date is on Tokens & usage. If you need more before then, press Get more on that line, then Get more tokens on Tokens & usage. Customers see tokens, never dollar amounts, for AI work. The line turns amber when about a fifth is left, so you're never caught off guard in the middle of a busy week.

Yes. When your customer presses Approve or Request changes on a proof you sent from Printer’s Helper, aiKit emails the account that sent it. The subject is Approved: followed by the job name, or Changes requested: followed by the job name, with the customer's note quoted. An Open the job button takes you straight to that job. The same answer also shows on the job itself, in Your jobs and All jobs, and in the counts on your print shop dashboard, so you can see it even without the email. aiKit also emails you about your allowance: once a month when you're down to your last job, and once when none are left. Accounts on Unlimited or Comp plans don't get those allowance emails.

Open the email titled You're invited to Printer’s Helper on aiKit and press Set my password. Choose a password of at least 8 characters, and you're signed in and taken straight to Printer’s Helper, with your account's job allowance already set up. The invitation link works once and for 7 days. If it has expired, reply to the invitation email to ask for a new one. If you already set a password, log in at aikit.ai/login, or use Forgot password? there to get a reset link. Once you're in, a good first step is to open Shop profile at the top right and add your logo and company details, so every proof you send carries your branding. Then drop in a customer's file and say what it needs.

Yes. Content Kit (in the Tool library, at /tools/content-kit) writes blog posts in the brand voice you set in Brand Voice (/tools/brand-voice): a mix of tones, who you write for, the reading level, words to use and avoid, topics, rules, and as many samples of your own writing as you like, which it matches without copying. You type or say an idea in the New post step (or paste notes, or a link to a page to write from), set the brand voice, the length (Short about 600 words, Standard about 1,200, Long about 2,000, In-depth about 3,000, or your own number), the writing quality (Quick draft, Balanced, Best, Polished, or Fact-checked, the last two being Best plus one extra pass), and Keep it positive (on by default, with its rules shown and editable). More options adds a post type (like How-to guide, Comparison, Seasonal or holiday promo, or Product spotlight), who it is for, reading level, call to action, an FAQ on or off, a comparison table, and an offer you confirm. Plan my post (free) asks 3 to 5 quick tap-to-answer questions written for your idea, shows six idea cards built from your words, and suggests ways to make the post stronger; Skip questions and write goes straight to the draft. Type it the way you'd say it: the writer turns a rambling request into a proper title and search phrase. In about 1 to 3 minutes, with a card showing the step it's on, the full draft opens in the editor, with sections, an FAQ, a search title and description, a suggested address, links to add, and a photo spot for each section. Tick Show me the outline first if you want to change the sections before it writes. For example, a dog groomer could type "How often should a doodle be groomed?" and edit the finished post right on the page: change the photo, the title, or the topic by clicking it, type and format in the visual editor, or ask for changes in plain words. Every change is kept as a version, and you download the post as Markdown or HTML.

Yes. In Content Kit's Product descriptions tab, open Bulk and paste one product per line (the name, a dash, then specs or notes) or upload a CSV with a column called name, and up to 25 products are written at once, three at a time, on aiKit's side, so you can close the page and the list keeps going. Each product gets a short and a long description, key features, a specs table built only from your notes, a search title and description, and three photo alt texts. A review grid shows every product with Approve, Write again (free, with an optional note like "shorter"), and All details. When you are done, download a CSV of the approved rows or all of them. For example, a small home-goods shop can paste twenty items with their sizes and materials and review the whole set in one sitting. Details a buyer would want that your notes lack, such as care instructions, are listed instead of guessed.

In Brand Voice (/tools/brand-voice), press New voice (or, before your first voice, one of the three ways to start under Make your first voice) and pick who it's for: you, one of your brands (or A new brand…), a client (shared by all of that client's websites), or one website. A website's voice sits on top of its client's voice: anything the website sets wins, and words, topics, and rules from both apply. A website with no client sits on top of its owner's own voice. Each project page also has a Brand voice tab with a summary and Open in Brand Voice, and Content Kit shows Writing in: with the voice it is using.

No. Content Kit's writer is told never to invent prices, discounts, statistics, years in business, awards, licenses, reviews, or customer names. When a sentence needs a fact it was not given, it writes around it or leaves a short placeholder in square brackets, such as [years in business], and every statement you should confirm appears in a Check before publishing list next to the draft, with the reason. Product specs come only from the notes you provide, and missing details are listed under Buyers may ask about rather than filled in. Offers appear only when one of your rules names them. It still is an AI and can get general facts wrong, so read each draft and work through the checklist before you publish it. Approving a draft is your sign-off and locks it; a post goes on an aiKit website only when you press Put it on the site and confirm, and on a site where changes wait for Publish it lands in the site's draft for you to check first.

Yes. Every draft has AI help with four buttons: Better titles, Search descriptions, Search phrases, and Editor notes that list what an editor would fix, each with a Fix it that turns the advice into a change request. Suggestions only change the draft when you press Use this, and AI help is free. One Ready to publish score, from 0 to 100, checks length, search details, FAQ, links, pictures, and blanks to fill, straight from the text. In the side panel you pick a cover and section pictures from your own Graphics Library, ranked by the post's words, and you can save the suggested alt text onto the graphic. For example, a kitchen remodeler can pick a finished-kitchen photo for a timeline post and see that post listed under the photo's Where it's used.

Your posts, in Content Kit's Blog posts tab, works as a review queue. Tiles count posts that need content, flagged posts (thin, or marked Needs rewrite or Not a blog post), posts nobody has reviewed, approved posts, and posts on or off your website; press a tile to see just those, and the view keeps its own link. The list puts empty and unreviewed posts first, then the lowest score. Each row has a review status that saves as you pick it (Not reviewed, Keep as is, Needs rewrite, Not a blog post, or Approved, which locks the post), notes with a microphone, the main search phrase, every publishing check with a score out of 100, Read the post, Duplicate as a new draft, Take off the site, and Delete. Undo last change reverses any of the last ten changes. For example, a bakery owner can mark last year's holiday post Needs rewrite with a note to update the hours, and duplicate it as this year's draft.

Yes. Blog ideas, below your posts, is a saved idea queue: add ideas by hand with a main search phrase and notes, or type what you want posts about in the New post step and press Suggest 6 ideas to add six about exactly that (naming the products, brands, or events you mentioned; a fact check reads each idea next to what you gave and rewrites or drops any that claim a feature, how a product works, performance, a price, a rental, a store, or a season you never mentioned, while ordinary topics like cost or how to choose stay; the six show right there as cards with an intent tag, why readers click, and the search phrase; More ideas adds another set, and Topic groups offers 3 to 5 chips that each add ideas from one group), built with your business, your brand voice's topic pillars, and how people search, skipping posts and ideas you already have. Each idea is Proposed, Picked, In progress, or Published, and Write this writes a post from it right away, linking the two. When you write for an aiKit website, an approved post has Put it on the site: aiKit's site editor adds it at /blog/ and makes a blog page if there is none. On a site where changes wait for Publish (the default), it lands in the site's draft for you to check and publish; on a site set to publish automatically it goes live. Take off the site removes it the same way. For example, a landscaper can queue ten seasonal ideas in March and publish one a week.

Content Kit uses your account's tokens, the same tokens every aiKit AI tool uses. A blog post's full draft uses tokens, and so does each product's first description, so a list of ten products uses ten times as many. Generating a first draft again on a post that is already written uses tokens again. Everything around those is free: blog ideas, outlines, asking for changes to a draft, Rewrite & expand, every Suggest button, writing a product again, suggesting a brand voice, and every download. If the writer stops partway, nothing is counted and the page says so. The tokens left show at the top right of the Content Kit page, and the line turns amber when you are close to the limit. Tokens renew each month on your account's renewal day; Get more opens Tokens & usage. Putting an approved post on an aiKit website (Put it on the site) uses that website's AI edit allowance, like any other change to the site; for other sites, copy or download it.

Brand Kit (/tools/brand-voice, also /tools/brand-kit) is one place for how a business sounds and looks, shared by every aiKit tool: the voice (tone, words to use or avoid, rules, writing samples), the Look (logos, colors, fonts, picture style), References (emails, pages and ads you want new work to follow) and Learned (results you gave a thumbs up). Keep one for yourself, one per brand you run, one per client, and one per website. Email Studio, Content Kit, Video Kit, Photo Studio, Magic Canvas and Motion Maker show which kit they use and let you switch it.

Yes. A thumbs up on a result in a tool that makes something (an email, a post, a picture, a design, a video, a logo) is saved on the Brand Kit in use as a liked result, and Email Studio's Save this look saves an email's layout. Every tool's AI then leans toward what your liked results have in common, without copying them. The Brand Kit's Learned tab lists them; Forget removes one, and you can add your own note describing a look you like.

Yes. In Brand Kit's References tab, or Email Studio's Reference emails window, paste an email (words or HTML), upload an .html, .eml or .txt file or a screenshot, or save the email you have open. Each can be switched off or removed. When the AI writes an email, it follows the references in use for structure, length and tone, never their exact words, prices or dates. Web pages and ads can be saved as references for other writing too.

A brand voice is how a business sounds in writing: its tone, the words it uses and avoids, how easy it is to read, and the topics and rules it sticks to. aiKit's Brand Voice (/tools/brand-voice, free for every signed-in account) lets you set that once for yourself, each client, and each website, and then Content Kit's blog posts and product descriptions and the website Assistant all write in it. You can mix several tones with weights, such as 70% Friendly and 30% Expert, give each channel (website, blog, product copy, email, social) its own mix, and score any text against the voice from 0 to 100.

Yes. In Brand Voice, choose Learn from my writing and add as many samples as you like: paste text, upload several files at once (PDF, Word .docx, plain text, Markdown, or HTML, up to 8 MB each), or paste links to pages you wrote. Label each one as a blog post, product description, website page, email, social post, or other. aiKit reads all of them and proposes a tone mix, a tone per channel where your writing differs, sentence style, words to use and avoid, do and don't lists, topics, and rules, each trait backed by a short quote from your own samples that is checked word for word. A card then shows the voice it made: the name, the tone mix in words, a short sample written in the voice, do and don't lists, and the quotes it found. Press Use this voice to save it and write in it, or Adjust it first to change anything. Nothing is saved until you choose.

Yes. Choose Describe it in your words, type a few notes such as "Family-run landscaping crew, friendly and down-to-earth, short sentences, always mention free estimates," and press Draft my voice. aiKit drafts the full voice, including a tone mix, words, topics, and rules, and shows it on one card with a short sample written in it. Use this voice saves it and makes it the voice you write in; Adjust it first opens the editor. You can also draft it from a website address, or answer four short guided questions instead.

Yes. Pick up to four of sixteen tones (Friendly, Expert, Straight-talking, Calm, Premium, Playful, Bold, Caring, Inspiring, Clean and modern, Down-to-earth, Witty, Poetic, Futuristic, Energetic, Heartfelt), or type your own, like whimsical, and set how much of each with a slider; the percentages always add up to 100 and the first tone leads. Under Want a different tone for some channels? you pick one or more of Website, Blog, Products, Email, and Social with chips and give them one shared mix and a short note, for example more Playful on blog and social together, and more Straight-talking on product pages.

Topic pillars are the few subjects your content should be known for; blog ideas come from them. For a landscaping company, they might be Seasonal lawn care tips, Before & after projects, and Local service areas. Rules are instructions every piece follows, such as Always mention free estimates, Never promise same-day service, or Link to the booking page in every post. Brand Voice shows ready examples for eight kinds of business with one-click Use this, such as Always say 'licensed and insured' and Never say 'cheap' for a home repair company, and you can add your own pillars and rules. Each rule can apply to everything or only some channels, and a rule marked Required is checked word for word by the voice checker using trigger phrases or a page link.

Yes. In Brand Voice, open the Tone tab and press Suggest tone options. aiKit reads what you've filled in and any writing samples, then offers two to four clearly different tones, each with a name, three to five tone words, a tone mix, do and don't tips, and a sample line in that tone. It describes how to sound, not what the business does, and removes business and people's names. Press Use this tone to make it your voice's tone and save it at once, or Use and edit to adjust it first.

Yes. Besides your own business voice, you can keep as many named brand voices as you need (up to 50), one per brand you run, such as a second business or a product line, plus one voice per client and one per website. In Brand Voice, press New voice, choose A new brand… under Your brands, and name it. To write in it, pick it with Switch voice in Content Kit or under Voice when you create a project. For example, a bakery owner who also runs a food truck can keep a warm, neighborly voice for the bakery and a quicker, playful one for the truck.

Yes. Under Notes for the customer in Quote Studio, Rewrite in my voice rewrites the note in your saved Brand Voice with the same facts and nothing added, and Check against my voice scores it from 0 to 100 with suggested edits you can apply one at a time. Nothing changes until you press Use this or Apply. An optional Tone for this one leans a single rewrite warmer or more urgent without changing the saved voice. Both are free.

Every brand voice has Sound like a person, not AI turned on by default. Writers then skip the phrases that give AI writing away, such as unlock, elevate, seamless, game-changer, and "in today's fast-paced world", avoid piles of three adjectives, vary sentence length, and use real details instead of grand claims. The checker also flags any of those phrases it finds, so it is checked, not just asked. You can turn it off in a voice's Words tab if you want a deliberately polished style.

Give it the facts once. In the New post step, paste the product's page under Product page and aiKit reads it and writes only from what it says (a Facts from line shows what was read). Or save each product in Content Kit's Product facts tab: name, other names, what it is and does, who it's for, key specs, an optional price note, and the page link (Fill from this page reads it for you). Blog posts and product descriptions use those facts whenever they name the product. If a post names a product with no facts anywhere, Plan my post first asks what it is and who buys it; skip that and the post marks what to fill in instead of guessing.

Keep it positive is a switch in a voice's Tone tab. It is on for every new voice, whether you answer questions, describe it, learn from your writing, or start blank, and you can turn it off. With it on, writing leads with what is possible and what the reader gains, and still states limits, delays, and bad news plainly and kindly, with the next step. It never lectures or forces cheer. For example, instead of "Unfortunately, we cannot finish this week," a note might read "The tile arrives Friday, so we'll finish Monday." In Content Kit, Keep it positive is on for every new blog post in the New post step, whatever the voice says; See the rules shows the rule set it follows (aiKit Positive by default, or one you saved in your library), and Edit or make rule sets changes them.

Open the voice, go to Hear it & check, paste the text, pick where it will appear, and press Check how well it matches. You get a score from 0 to 100, the tones aiKit heard next to your voice's mix, pass or fix checks for words to avoid, point of view, sentence length, and required rules, and suggested edits that quote the exact words to change with a rewrite you can apply in one click. Hear it in this voice shows a message written the generic way next to your voice, side by side, even before you save changes.

Yes, where it does the job as well. In the Graphics Library, Suggest labels (category, tags, alt text, description, and quality) and Enlarge 2× run on your own computer with small open-source models, so they cost nothing and your pictures stay on your device; only the finished labels or the new picture are saved. The first time, each sets itself up once (about 150 MB for labels, 8 MB for enlarging), then starts at once. It needs a browser with graphics support (recent Chrome, Edge, or Safari on most computers); when that isn't there, labels use aiKit's AI as before. Writing, quotes, print checks and website edits stay on aiKit's main AI, where quality matters most.

Graphics Library is where a team keeps its logos, photos, and design files, labeled so anyone can find the right one fast. Open Graphics in the sidebar. You can drop in a whole folder at once, and each graphic can carry a client, one or more projects, categories, tags, a rating (Approved, Best, or Not using), and alt text for websites. Search reads file and folder names, tags, alt text, and descriptions, and filters narrow by how each graphic is used (Logo, Web graphic, Social post, Print file, Photo, Icon, Illustration, or Document), client, project, whether it is used anywhere, file type, source, category, tag, main color, shape, size, date added, who added it, and what still needs doing. Each graphic's details also show Looks similar, other graphics whose pictures are closest to it. For example, an agency can upload a client's folder of 300 photos, tag them all "storefront" in one step, and later find the five Best landscape shots for a new homepage in a few clicks. Every graphic and every filtered view has its own link to share with a teammate.

In Graphics Library, press Upload, or drag files or whole folders anywhere onto the page; you can also paste a copied picture. Folders inside folders keep their names. JPG, PNG, WebP, GIF, HEIC, AVIF, BMP, TIFF, SVG, AI, EPS, PSD, PDF, and MP4, MOV, M4V, or WebM videos are accepted, up to 25 MB each, and each team can keep up to 2 GB. Three files upload at a time, each with its own progress, and a file that stops shows Retry, which sends only the missing parts. Before, during, or after uploading, set what applies to the whole batch: client, project (or a new one, made right there), categories, tags, and rating; files already sent are updated too. Same as last batch reuses your previous choices, and folder names are offered as one-click suggestions, so a folder called "Maple Street Bakery" suggests that client. When the upload finishes, Review this upload shows only those files, ready to label together. Videos get a poster frame made in your browser and play in their details; AVI and MKV files, and converting clips to a web format, are Coming soon.

Yes. Before each file uploads, aiKit compares it with every graphic you can see and with the other files in the same upload. It compares the pictures themselves, not just the names, so the same photo saved as a new file name, resized, or exported again is still caught. A match pauses that one file and shows the graphic it matches with its preview, labeled Same file as or Looks like. Choose Skip or Upload anyway for each, or use Skip exact copies and Upload all look-alikes to decide for the whole upload at once. Everything else keeps uploading while you decide. Different crops of the same scene can count as different pictures, so a close variation may upload without a warning; the Looks like check is tuned to avoid flagging pictures that are only similar in style.

Yes, two ways, and neither changes anything until you click. From the file name suggestions appear right away in a graphic's details, built from its file and folder names: tags, a category, and a client whose name appears in the path. Suggest labels, in the bottom bar after selecting graphics or in one graphic's details, sends a small preview of each picture to aiKit's AI, which suggests a category, a few tags, alt text, a one-line description, and a quality rating, reusing the words your team already uses. In the graphic's details each suggestion has Accept, Edit, and Turn down, and the review queue (Suggestions to review, at the top of the library) handles many at once. Accepted tags are only ever added; your own tags stay. Accepting for many graphics at once fills alt text and descriptions only where they are empty. AI suggestions have a monthly limit per team, and the AI can be wrong, so read alt text before it goes on a website.

Graphics you upload belong to your workspace, and everyone in your workspace can see and change them. When you add a graphic to a client or a project, people with access to that client or project can see it too. Reviewers can view and download those graphics but can't label, move, or delete them; their details panel says View only. Nobody else can see a preview, download a file, or open a graphic's link. Originals, including SVG and PDF files, always download as files and never open inside aiKit. Removing a graphic from a project only unlinks it. Delete moves it to the Trash for 30 days, and Restore brings it back; only your team and staff on its clients or projects can delete or restore.

Open the project and choose its Graphics tab. Add from library opens a picker with search; pick as many graphics as you need and press Add. Upload opens the upload window with that project already chosen, so new files land in the project and the library at the same time. A graphic can belong to many projects, and to several clients, at once. For a client's project, the picker's Suggested tab ranks your graphics for that project and never shows another client's graphics. Remove on the Graphics tab takes a graphic off that project only; it stays in the library and in every other project. Open in library shows the same graphics with every search and filter, and in any graphic's details, Clients and projects lists everywhere it is used, with links to each project.

No. AI suggestions in aiKit's Graphics Library are always staged for a person to approve. Suggest labels asks the AI for a category, tags, alt text, a description, and a quality rating (Top, Good, or Low) for each picture, and the results wait in the review queue, opened from Suggestions to review at the top of the library. Each card merges the suggestions into editable fields; Approve saves exactly what the card shows, Turn down keeps the graphic as it was, and Hide graphic keeps it out of pickers. In a single graphic's details, a purple bar says suggestions are waiting, and each suggested field (category, each tag, alt text, description, quality) has its own Accept, Edit, and Turn down. Accepting suggested tags only adds them; your own tags are never removed or replaced. Approve these as suggested handles a whole screen at once. Every decision can be undone from History, and the Reviewed tab lists recent decisions so a wrong call is easy to fix. AI suggestions have a monthly limit per team.

Yes, any change, even days later. Every change to labels, categories, clients and projects, collections, quality, rating, focus and crop, hiding, and the Trash is saved to a server-side history, whether it touched one graphic or 2,000. Right after a change, an Undo button shows for a few seconds; later, History (next to Upload) lists every change your team made, and each graphic's details list its own. Undo puts the earlier values back. If someone changed the same field again since, their newer value stays, and the message says how many were kept, so undoing an old change never wipes out newer work.

Graphics Library has four ways to organize beyond categories and tags. Collections are your team's own named, ordered groups, like Spring promo or Homepage picks: add selected graphics from the bottom bar, then choose the collection in the filters to Arrange its order, Rename it, or delete just the group (its graphics stay). Favorites are personal stars; only you see your list. Quality (Top, Good, Low) says how usable a graphic is on a professional page and decides what suggestions show first. Hide keeps a graphic in the library and where it is already used, but out of pickers and suggestions; aiKit tells you where it is used before you hide it or delete it. For example, a studio can keep a client's 40 best storefront photos in a Homepage picks collection, in the order they should appear.

Open Graphics Library and click Find duplicates in the counts at the top. aiKit groups every graphic you can see with its copies, comparing the pictures themselves: Same file for exact copies, and Look alike for the same picture resized or saved again under another name. Each card shows its size, folder, how many labels it has, and how often it is used. Keep this one moves the others in the group to the Trash in one step, with Undo, and you can restore them from the Trash for 30 days. New uploads are checked the same way before they go in.

Yes. In a graphic's details, Focus and crop lets you click the part of the picture that must always stay in view and set a zoom. Four live previews show the result as Square (1:1), Portrait (4:5), Wide (16:9), and Link preview (1.91:1), so one setting covers social posts, feeds, banners, and shared links. Library cards and the shared picker use the same focus point, and the picker hands it over with the graphic.

Yes. Open a graphic and press View full size, or click its big preview. The viewer fills the screen; zoom from 25% to 800% with the plus and minus buttons, the + and − keys, or ⌘ or Ctrl with the scroll wheel, and drag to move around. Photos load the original file for full detail, and Actual size shows them pixel for pixel. PDFs show every page, sharp at any zoom, and their details list the page size and count, for example 5.5 × 8.5 in · 2 pages. Thumbnails of PDFs are a real picture of page 1. Next to the picture you can download the original and change its tags, categories, clients, projects, and collections without leaving the viewer.

Yes. In the upload window, Client and Project each end with + New client… and + New project…. Type a name and press Add client or Add project; it is created and chosen for the whole upload on the spot. A new project is saved on hold with nothing built, so it costs nothing until you build it from Projects. The same choices appear in a graphic's details and in the full-size viewer.

Press the ⋯ button on the graphic's card and choose Delete, or press Delete in its details or in the full-size viewer. To delete many, select them and press Delete in the bottom bar. Before anything happens, aiKit shows where each graphic is used (web pages, blog posts, emails, projects, and Hub links) and what deleting changes. Deleted graphics go to the Trash, leave the library and pickers right away, and can be restored for 30 days; right after deleting there is also an Undo button. Nothing that uses a deleted graphic breaks: pages, posts, emails, proofs, and Hub items that link it keep showing it, and aiKit keeps the file until it's taken off there, even past 30 days. After 30 days, graphics in the Trash that aren't used anywhere are deleted for good and the storage they used is freed; Delete forever and Empty the Trash do that sooner, with no Undo. Reviewers and clients can view and download graphics but never delete them.

Yes. To switch companies, use the Showing row at the top of Graphics Library: All, then a chip for each client that has graphics (with its count), then No client; a client with projects gets a second row of project chips. It's the same switch as Working on in the sidebar. The first filters in Graphics Library are Type, Client, Project, and Where used. Type sorts graphics by how they're used: Logo, Web graphic, Social post, Print file, Photo, Icon, Illustration, Document or PDF (PDFs count as documents on their own), or Music (music files count on their own), and No type yet finds the ones still to sort. Each choice shows how many graphics it has. More filters adds file type (PNG, JPG, SVG, PDF and more), source (uploaded, made with AI, or made in an aiKit tool), category, tag, collection, color, shape, size, date added, and who added it. Set a graphic's type with one tap in its details, or for many at once with Type in the bottom bar. Every filter lives in the page address, so a view like one client's logos is a link you can bookmark, share, or save as a saved view.

Yes. Select graphics in Graphics Library, open More in the bottom bar, and choose Download as a zip. aiKit puts the original files, exactly as uploaded, into one zip, up to 200 files or 400 MB at a time; names that repeat get a number so nothing is overwritten. Reviewers can download the graphics they can see the same way. Each zip download is logged in History with who downloaded how many files. One graphic's original downloads from its details with Download original.

Open Presentation Builder from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/decks) and press New presentation. 1: pick what it is for (pitch, client proposal, lesson, school project, training, report or story), say the goal in your own words, who is watching and how many minutes you have, and optionally add files, web links, notes and photos. 2: check the slide plan and change anything. 3: pick a look and press Build. You get a finished deck with speaker notes that you can click and type into or change by asking in plain words.

It is told to use only what you give it (your files, links, notes and what you typed) plus general knowledge for teaching topics. When a slide needs a number, price or fact you did not provide, it writes a clear placeholder and lists it in the speaker notes instead of inventing it. You should still read every slide before you present.

Yes. ⬇ PowerPoint gives you a real .pptx with editable text, charts, tables, pictures and speaker notes. ⬇ PDF opens a print page with one slide per page; choose Save as PDF. The Share tab turns on a live link that shows the newest saved version to anyone who has the address (view only, no speaker notes) and can be turned off any time. Video export is not available yet.

Yes. The Lesson kind adds learning goals, quiz slides after each section (clickable when presenting) and a recap, with teacher notes. The School project kind adds a Sources slide from the files and links you gave it. In the Check tab, paste a grading rubric and the AI scores the deck line by line and suggests a fix for each. Pick the audience (for example Middle school students) and the words are written at that level.

Yes, all optional. In the Slide tab choose Record my voice, upload a short audio or video clip (up to 4 MB), or paste a YouTube, Vimeo or direct link. Audio plays by itself when you reach the slide in Present. Auto-play reads each slide aloud (your speaker notes if you have them, using your browser's own voice) or plays the recorded audio, and moves on by itself, so the deck presents itself. CC adds live captions of what you say, using your browser's speech recognition with nothing sent to aiKit. Slides can also build in, fade or zoom. The PowerPoint download does not include sound or video; for a finished video file, use Video Kit.

Before you press Build you see an estimate of the AI tokens and time for your deck (a 40-slide deck from a long source takes about two minutes and roughly 70,000 tokens). While it builds, a timer and each step show on screen (reading your sources, writing the slides in parts, finding photos, saving), and when it finishes the editor chat tells you the exact tokens used. The AI may also ask a few optional questions first; click an answer, type your own, or skip.

Yes. Add your PDF or PowerPoint under Files (any size). It is read in your browser: the exact words of every page and the pictures on each page. Keep my file's structure builds one slide per page in the same order (a 35-page PDF becomes 35 slides), keeps your definitions and terms word for word, and places each of your pictures on the slide about the same thing. Free stock photos are only added if you tick the box. Afterwards you can delete or drag slides, click text to type, change pictures, or highlight words and ask the AI to reword just those.

Yes. In the Script & Voice tab, write a script for each slide (with AI or by typing or speaking it), and the tool tells you if it is realistic for the time: about 150 words a minute, so a 20-second slide holds about 46 words. Pick a stock voice or your own voice made in Voice Kit from your recordings, then press Make the voices. Press Play the talking presentation and every slide is spoken and the deck moves on by itself. The share link plays the same way for anyone you send it to, without showing them your script. Voices use your tokens.

Yes. The Practice tab in the editor runs your deck full screen with a countdown on every slide and, with your microphone allowed, listens while you rehearse. You get your time against plan, speaking pace, filler words a minute, long pauses, and which key points on each slide you said or skipped. Practice one section at a time, keep a history of runs to see if you are improving, and use the Audience Q&A drill to answer six tough questions about your deck. Your spoken words are analyzed in your browser and never saved. Chrome or Safari works best.

Yes. In the Timing tab set the total minutes, fit the slides to it, and adjust each section's minutes. In Present (or a Practice run) each slide shows a countdown in the corner: minutes, then seconds counting down, amber when time is short and red and flashing in the last 10 seconds. You also see time left in the section, which section is next, and time left overall, with an optional auto-next at zero, a soft tick in the last three seconds, pause, and a practice summary that compares your real time with the plan. Timers are for the speaker only and do not show on the shared link.

Yes. On the Presentation Builder home screen press Import a presentation and choose your PowerPoint file (.pptx, .ppsx, .pptm, .ppsm, .potx or .potm, any size up to 250 MB). Keep my slides copies your slides, text, tables, speaker notes and pictures into the editor for free with no AI; Rebuild it fresh with AI writes a new deck from the words. From Keynote use File > Export To > PowerPoint, from Google Slides use File > Download > Microsoft PowerPoint (.pptx), and from LibreOffice or an old .ppt file save as .pptx first. PDF, Word, text and web links can be added as sources. Animations, audio and video are not carried over.

Yes to both. To refresh a deck, open Ask AI, then Update from new info, add the new numbers, file or link and press Update my deck; only the slides the new information affects change, and the reply lists exactly what changed. To rebuild an old PowerPoint, start a new presentation and add the .pptx file as a source: the AI reads its words and speaker notes and builds a fresh deck. Pictures inside the old file are not carried over; add them again from your uploads or your Graphics Library.

Yes. Open the quote and press Proposal deck (or More, then Proposal deck on a phone). aiKit builds a client proposal deck from that quote: what they asked for, what is included, the timeline, a pricing table with your real line items and total, and the payment terms. It uses only what the quote says (never the private note or your costs) and does not invent prices or dates. Check every slide, then share the live link or download it as PowerPoint or PDF.

Yes. Your own photos are used first. Then Add photos to my slides (in Ask AI) finds a real stock photo for every slide that can show one, and a new deck gets them automatically when you didn't add your own. Photos are free, watermark-free Pexels photos saved with your deck. You can swap any of them in the Slide tab with Free stock photos, From my Graphics Library or Upload a photo. Slides about ideas that can't be photographed are listed, not faked.

Yes. In Ask AI choose Make a version for another audience, pick or type who it is for (for example Middle school students, Parents, Executives, or Spanish speakers), and aiKit makes a copy with every slide and speaker note rewritten for them. Facts, numbers, slide order and pictures stay the same, and your original deck is not changed.

Yes. In the Share tab turn on the live link, then give students the Student view link. They read at their own pace, can have each slide read aloud, mark every slide Got it or Show me again later, must answer each quiz question, and finish with a personal study plan of the questions they missed. Student view itself uses no AI and keeps each student's progress on their own device only. You can also turn on a Student AI tutor in the Share tab: students ask questions and it answers only from the slides, never your speaker notes, and says so when the lesson doesn't cover something. It uses your tokens up to a daily limit you choose, and it is off by default. The Study guide link opens a printable sheet of key points and quiz answers.

Yes. Every AI change and every pause in typing is saved as a version. Open the History tab and press Go back on any version; that is saved as a new version, so nothing is lost. Undo and Redo in the top bar also undo your hand edits.

Open Music Maker from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/music-maker). Describe the song in your own words or tap styles (genre, mood, tempo, instruments, vocal style, era, and what it's for), choose AI lyrics, your own lyrics, or Instrumental, pick a length from 15 seconds to 3 minutes, and press Make 2 songs. Each click makes two versions to choose from in about 30 to 90 seconds. Play them in the player at the bottom, then download MP3 or WAV, save to your Graphics Library, or send one to Video Kit, Motion Maker, or Voice Kit.

A click uses 100 tokens from your plan's monthly token pool and makes 2 songs; the Business-safe Pro engine uses 400 tokens up to 1 minute, 512 up to 2 minutes and 768 up to 3 minutes. Versions that don't finish aren't charged. Free accounts can make 3 clicks of 30-second clips a month. Music & Video packs add more tokens on top of a plan.

Yes. Each song shows a line with the engine's terms; all of Music Maker's engines allow commercial use. For the safest choice for business work, use the Business-safe Pro engine, which is trained on licensed music. Music Maker writes original music and lyrics; it won't copy a real artist's voice or a real song's lyrics.

Yes, if you own it or have the rights. In Music Maker, open Remix a song, confirm you have the rights, upload an MP3, WAV, or M4A (up to 25 MB), describe the new version or tap styles, and choose how much to change it, from a little to a lot. Remix makes 2 versions per click, for the same 100 tokens.

Yes. In Music Maker, pick Just for fun at the top, then say what the song is about (press the microphone to say it out loud), or tap an idea like a birthday roast or a song about your pet. Choose an Occasion, a Song vibe (Chart-topper, Stadium anthem, Movie trailer…), a Lyric style (Top 40 hit, Epic, Nostalgic…), and Fun & funny twists like a kazoo solo or an overly dramatic opera. Add any style of your own with + Add your own; it's saved for next time.

Yes. Open the song in Music Maker and press Cut for ads: download a 6-second bumper, a 15-, 30-, or 60-second spot with a clean fade at the end, or a seamless loop for videos and hold music. Cuts are made in your browser and are free.

Yes. In Music Maker, pick the client in For, then press Send for approval. The song becomes a Customer Proof: your client plays it, comments on any moment, and approves from the link you send in Customer Proofs.

Yes. In Music Maker's Remix tab, press Hum or sing an idea, record up to 60 seconds (hum, sing a line, or tap a beat), describe the style you want, and press Remix it. You get 2 versions built from your idea.

Yes. Open the song, press Send to…, and choose Voice Kit. Your next voice read gets the song as a music bed that dips while the voice speaks, and Download with music saves one mixed file. Send to Video Kit or Motion Maker works the same way for videos and animations.

Open Scene Studio from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/scene-studio). Pick Business or Fun & creative, then Describe it, Animate a photo, or Restyle my video. Write what should happen, click any looks you like (styles, camera moves, effects, lighting, sound), pick the shape and length, and press Make. The button shows the tokens before you press it. The clip takes about 1 to 3 minutes, saves to your Graphics Library, and can be downloaded or sent to Video Kit or Motion Maker.

Yes. In Scene Studio, press New character, give it a name, a few words on what never changes, and 1 to 4 pictures from your Graphics Library (a clear front view first). Click the character to put it in a video, up to 3 at once. Storyboard stills use its pictures as references, and the Same character engine takes them directly so the face and outfit match from scene to scene. Use only pictures you own or have permission to use.

Yes. Pick Script & storyboard, choose a script type (ad, explainer, product demo, testimonial, social reel, funny skit, story, music video, tutorial, announcement, real-estate tour, event promo and more), click a hook, tone and ending if you like, and write or say your idea. You can also attach a script or brief (PDF or Word), look pictures, or a link or clip whose feel you want. Write the script (a few tokens) returns every scene with its shot, a spoken line, voiceover, on-screen words and a transition, plus the music it calls for. Change any of it in plain words, then draw stills, approve, and animate; voiceover lines go to Voice Kit and the clips join in Video Kit in order.

Two ways in Scene Studio. Script & storyboard plans several scenes (up to about 2 minutes), each 3 to 15 seconds, then Join in Video Kit puts the finished clips in order with their lengths and transitions. Or press Continue the shot under any clip: a new clip starts exactly where the last one ended, from its final frame. The cost of every clip shows on its button before you press it.

Each clip uses tokens from your plan, and Scene Studio shows the exact number on the Make button before you press it. It depends on the engine, the length and sound: a Quick draft is the cheapest, Everyday is the best value, Best quality costs the most. If a clip fails, its tokens are given back automatically. Quick draft and Everyday work on the Free plan; bigger plans include more tokens (see Billing).

Yes. In Scene Studio, pick Animate a photo and choose a picture from your Graphics Library or upload one; it becomes the first frame and the clip moves from it. Or pick Restyle my video, choose a clip up to 10 seconds, and say how it should change (a new style, a snowy night, a different setting); the new clip keeps your clip's length.

Open Voice Kit from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/voice-kit). Start a voiceover: type or paste a script, bring one in from a Word file, PDF, web page, or Writing Pack draft, or start blank and have AI write it. Each paragraph becomes a line. Pick who reads it (your own AI voice or a stock voice) and press Read it. Change any line and press Read the changed lines: only those are read again. Download MP3 or WAV, save it to your Graphics Library, or press Use in Motion Maker to put it under an animation with the music dipping while it speaks.

Yes. In Voice Kit, press Make your own voice, read a short consent sentence aloud, and record or upload 1 to 2 minutes of yourself talking (at least 30 seconds). Before the voice is made, the consent recording is turned into text and checked against the sentence, and a basic check compares its pitch and tone with your samples so it has to be the same person. Your recordings and voice are private to your account, and deleting the voice deletes it at the voice service too. Only your own voice is allowed. Making your own voice is open to admins until a final legal review; stock voices work for everyone.

Yes. Voice Kit's AI writer is one box: tell it what the voiceover should say (or leave it blank), pick what it's for and a tone, and press Write it; it writes to the length you set (15, 30, 60, 90 seconds or any length you type) in your Brand Voice. Then the same box takes any change in plain words, Improve the copy polishes it while keeping every fact, and Write a new version starts fresh. Parts you didn't ask about stay exactly as they were, so they keep their reads. Afterward it lists what was done and, first, anything it didn't do and why, and Undo puts the script back. It never makes up facts like prices or phone numbers; it leaves a placeholder and tells you.

Highlight the word in your script and press Fix how it's said. Say what's wrong (for example the wrong syllable is stressed, or it spells it out), in your own words if you like, and press Find fixes. Voice Kit suggests spellings the voice will say right, and you hear each one in your chosen voice before keeping it. Use everywhere saves it to your pronunciation list so every future read says it that way; Just in this script changes only this voiceover. Only the parts that use the word are read again.

Yes. In Part by part, each paragraph has its own Feeling (Natural, Happy, Excited, Confident, Warm, Calm, Serious, Curious, Surprised, Sad), Pace (Slower, Normal, Faster), and Voice, so one script can have a host and a guest. 3 takes reads a paragraph three ways so you keep the best one. Under the player you can add aiKit Original music that dips under the voice and download the mix, and download captions as .srt or .vtt.

Yes, as a voice recipe: a voice, a feeling, a pace, and background music saved under a name like Northwind ads. Press it to use it in one click. Recipes and your pronunciation list also apply when other aiKit tools read with a voice, such as Video Kit narration, so a brand sounds the same everywhere.

Yes. Under the player in Voice Kit, Direct the read takes any direction in plain words, typed or spoken: "more energy on this weekend", "slow down on the price", "sound like you're smiling". It changes the feeling, pace, and a few words of only the parts the direction is about and reads just those again, with Undo. The AI coach listens to the finished read and scores pace, clarity, and the opening, flags names that may be said wrong, and gives one-click fixes. You can also click any word in the transcript under the player to jump there, or highlight words to fix or direct them.

It's an AI voice made from an aiKit team member's own recordings, through the same consent sentence and checks every own voice goes through, and offered to every account. It's listed first under Stock voices with the label aiKit house voice, and it reads narration for accounts that haven't made a voice of their own. Like every voice in Voice Kit, it's labeled as AI.

That's the sample sound, used whenever the voice service is switched off. A note at the top of Voice Kit says so, and every sample read is labeled Sample sound. It follows the script's real pace and pauses so you can check timing and try every step, but it isn't a voice and is never passed off as one. MP3 download is off for samples; WAV works.

It uses your account's tokens at the voice service's real cost: reading is charged by the character, about 3 to 9 cents for a 30-second read, plus a small amount for each AI script change and safety check. Fixing a line reads only that line again, so changes cost little. If a request would go past what's left on your plan, it doesn't start and tells you.

Scripts that pretend to be spoken by someone you clearly aren't: a famous person speaking or endorsing in the first person, a well-known company, bank, or government office speaking as itself, or a message posing as one of them to ask for payment or personal details. Introducing yourself and your own business is fine. A quick check reads new lines before they're spoken and explains any refusal. Mentioning real people or companies, ads for your own business, and fictional characters are fine. Every voice in Voice Kit is labeled as an AI voice.

Record in a quiet, soft room (a bedroom or a closet full of clothes is ideal), about a hand's width from the microphone, in your normal ad voice. Mix in questions, numbers, and names, and record 1 to 2 minutes in total in the same place. Avoid music, TV, fans, echoey rooms, Bluetooth headsets, and ads with music under your voice. Voice Kit shows three things to read and checks each recording in your browser, telling you if it's too quiet, too loud, noisy, or full of silence.

Make the voiceover in Voice Kit, then press Use in Motion Maker under the player. It's saved to your Graphics Library and Motion Maker opens with it on the Music tab. There you set when it starts, its volume, and how far the music dips while it speaks. It plays in the preview and goes into MP4 and WebM clips; GIFs have no sound.

Open Motion Maker from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/motion-maker). 1: pick one of 26 animation styles from the live cards at the top (category tabs sort them: Smooth & elegant, Bold & punchy, Social & trends, Sale & retail, Cinematic, Events & holidays, Fun & creative, Layouts, Simple & clean). 2: Fill the scenes: the style loads as named scenes (for example Hook, Product, Product, Offer); press Pick a graphic on each scene, or Pick graphics for the empty scenes to choose several from your Graphics Library at once (or upload new photos), and type the words for each scene. The live preview plays your own graphics in that style the whole time; click a scene's picture to play from it. Add music in the Music tab and press GIF, MP4 clip, or WebM clip in the Export tab.

Yes. Motion Maker and Video Kit share 85 ready-made templates, and Video Kit adds 29 more: 17 for printing and promo products and real estate, including more just listed and just sold videos (a moving camera through the photos, 3D products with your logo, and regional looks for South Florida, the Northeast, the Southwest, the Mountain West and Pacific Northwest, and the Midwest and South), 3 for commercial real estate (office, retail, warehouse), and 9 new layouts for any business (big-word reveals, 3D cubes and carousels, split screens, your photo on a phone, laptop or billboard, a photo wall, a map pin, a scrapbook and a before-and-after wipe), for 24 industries plus ones for any business: restaurants and cafes, bakeries, bars, retail, real estate, contractors and home services, auto, salons and spas, fitness, clinics, lawyers and finance, pet care, wedding and event venues, churches, nonprofits, schools and courses, sports and concerts, printing and promo products, commercial real estate, signs and projection, manufacturers, tech, agencies, and hotels and travel. They come in four kinds: promotions and sales, talking and teaching (testimonials, tips, meet the owner), brand and social (logo intros, behind the scenes, recaps), and ads and listings (menus, home listings, product showcases, hiring, invites). Press Templates for your business, pick your industry and the kind of video, and the style, size, music, words and closing card are set; your logo goes in by itself from your brand kit, each scene says what photo or clip to add, and every word can be changed.

Yes. Click the words on the stage and use How the words move in the toolbar. Glide to a spot moves them from where they are to a spot you choose: drag the Ends here box on the stage, and pick a Smooth, Bouncy, or Quick landing. Float, Drift, Orbit, Zoom, Pulse, Shake, and News ticker move them in place. How many times sets Once, 2, 3, or 5 times, or The whole scene. To repeat a whole scene, set Plays once under it to 2× up to 10×. When you save, a GIF can play forever, once, or 2 to 10 times, and an MP4 or WebM can play up to 10 times in a row as one file.

Yes. Once you add photos, the first tab at the top is Made from your photos: cards that play your own photos and words as different takes, such as a different lead photo, a short 3-photo cut, a grid, or a movie-trailer look. Cards marked Idea try something new on your photos (words that glide in, a news ticker, a big finish with your logo, a price burst, words that beat with the music), and the last card opens Templates for your business. Picking one changes everything at once; Undo brings back what you had.

Twenty-six, each shown as a live card at the top, sorted into category tabs, and each loading its own named scenes. Smooth & elegant: Pan and zoom, Soft fade, Soft wipe, Circle reveal, Parallax layers. Bold & punchy: Zoom punch, Kinetic words. Social & trends: Bold captions (outlined words landing word by word with whip-pan swipes), Glitch cut. Sale & retail: Product spotlight, Countdown offer, Price burst (a spinning starburst behind your price), Flash sale (a brand-color band racing across). Cinematic: Logo reveal, Film letterbox (movie bars, grain, dips to black), Light leak. Events & holidays: Confetti pop, Twinkle lights, Invitation card (a cream card with your photo in an arch). Fun & creative: Photo stack, Comic pop (action lines, halftone dots, an ink frame), Sticker bounce (die-cut stickers on candy stripes). Layouts: Photo grid, Split screen. Simple & clean: Minimal, Classic. Picking one changes your animation at once, keeps your words and where you placed them, and Undo puts the old style back. Every style exports exactly as it plays.

Click any words right on the stage and type; drag them anywhere in the frame. A scene can have several text blocks: its main words plus up to six more, added with Add more text under the stage, or Add words and Add a button in the Scenes list (each box takes typing or the microphone). Every block has its own size (S to XL plus a size handle), turn (a handle that snaps to straight), color, font, letter look (shadow, outline, glow, 3D, neon, gradient, retro), box (dark, light, brand, or a button), line alignment, entrance, and an In at time in seconds, so you control where, when and how each one comes in. A 3×3 spot grid puts a block top left, center, bottom right and so on in one click, or drag it anywhere. With the keyboard, Tab to a block, press Enter to type and use the arrow keys to move it.

No. You can pick photos, set the order, choose a style, type the words, add music, and export without any AI. If you want a head start, the folded Let AI set it up row above the stage takes one sentence (for example, a 10-second story for a neighborhood flower shop's spring bouquets) and, in one quick AI call that costs a fraction of a cent, picks a style, size, length, and music mood and writes a few words for each photo in your Brand Voice, using only the facts you typed. Everything it sets can be changed by hand, and Undo puts your animation back exactly as it was. With no photos yet, it lists the photos to add and keeps the words ready for them.

Yes. Upload MP3, M4A, or WAV music in the Graphics Library like any file, or in Motion Maker's Music tab: Upload music takes an MP3, M4A, or WAV file up to 15 MB and saves it in your Graphics Library as music, tagged for the client or project you're working on, or Pick from your library uses music you saved before. Set where it starts, fades, and volume. Cut on the beat listens for a steady beat in your file and rounds each photo to whole beats; when it can't find one, photos keep even timing. Your music goes into MP4 and WebM clips (GIFs have no sound). Use only music you have the rights to: your own, music licensed for this use, or royalty-free music that allows it. In the Tool library preview, an uploaded file stays in your browser and is never sent.

Yes. Press Preview on Motion Maker in the Tool library and upload a few of your own photos: in the preview they stay in your browser and are never sent anywhere, and you can watch them play in every style, type on the stage, and add your own music. Saving isn't part of the preview; the bar across the top says Preview — practice copy, nothing is saved, and Open the real tool takes you to the real tool.

Yes for the aiKit Originals: all 16 (Bright Morning, Golden Hour, Easy Sunday, Big Reveal, Clean Studio, Night Drive, City Lights, Bounce, Corner Cypher, Late Shift, Still Water, First Light, Porch Light, Sunday Market, Snow Day, and Warm Wishes) are composed and played by aiKit itself, right in your browser, without any recording made by someone else, so you can use them anywhere, including paid ads, social posts, websites, and work for your clients, with no licence fee and no token line. Your own music works too: upload it in the Music tab (use only music you have the rights to).

Every aiKit Original has an exact tempo, so Motion Maker knows where each beat falls. With Cut on the beat on (the default when a track is chosen), each scene's length is rounded to whole beats of that track, at least two, so every change between photos lands on the music. With your own music, aiKit listens for a steady beat in the file and uses it the same way; when there's no steady beat, clips keep even timing. Turn it off in the Music tab to use exact seconds. Find the best spot picks the liveliest part of an aiKit Original as long as your animation, starting on a bar.

MP4 clip (with music, plays everywhere; Chrome, Edge, and Safari make it), WebM clip (with music, for websites), and GIF (no sound, up to 10 seconds, for email). Sizes: square 1080×1080, feed 4:5 1080×1350, story or reel 1080×1920, social banner 1200×628, wide clip 1920×1080, email banners 600×400, 600×441, and 600×338, email square 600×600, or any custom size from 100 to 2000 pixels. Clips are made in your browser frame by frame at a steady 30 frames a second, usually faster than they play; keep the tab open until it finishes. GIFs start on a complete still (for email apps that show only the first frame) and show their file size with email advice: under 1.5 MB is a good size.

Yes, two ways, both optional. Let AI set it up (above the stage) writes a few words per photo along with the style and size. Or, in Motion Maker's Edit tab, press Write captions in my Brand Voice, say what the promo is about (for example: fresh sourdough and pastries, baked daily, open 7 am to 3 pm), and press Write captions. aiKit writes one short caption per clip in the voice you saved in Brand Voice, keeping your facts and adding none, in positive words. Each line shows in its own box so you can change it before you press Put these on my clips. With no Brand Voice saved yet, it writes in a warm, plain tone and links you to set one up.

Yes. Save for later keeps the whole animation (photos and their order, style, words and where you placed them, framing, music, and settings) under a name, shared with your team, and saving again updates it. Saved animations lists the newest 50 with search, Open, Duplicate, and Delete, and each open animation has its own link (?project=) you can send a teammate. Your browser also keeps a draft every 8 seconds and offers Resume when you come back. A saved animation is the editable version; to get a file, export it, and save the file to your Graphics Library.

Open Video Kit from the Tool library (or go to aikit.ai/tools/video-kit) and drop in your clips, or press Choose clips. Editing starts at once in your browser. Press Make captions and the words appear word by word as people speak, with the spoken word lit up. Trim, split, and reorder pieces on the timeline, delete words in the Words tab to cut them from the video, pick music, then press Export MP4. Videos can be up to 3 minutes.

Yes. In Video Kit's Words tab, select words (click the first, shift-click the last) and press Delete: the video cuts with them, sharing the pause around the cut so it sounds natural. Cut words stay in the list, struck through, and one click brings them back. Double-click a word to fix its spelling in the captions without changing the sound.

In Video Kit, press Remove pauses and ums in the Words tab. It lists every long pause and every um or uh, each with a checkbox and the moment it happens, and says how many seconds cutting them saves. Untick any you want to keep and press Cut. One Undo puts them all back.

Yes. Type or say any change in the Ask for any change box, such as "make it 30 seconds for Instagram", "put the price on screen when I say it", or "add an outro that says Book this week". Video Kit makes the change with the same steps as its buttons, then lists anything it couldn't do under Not done yet, with the reason, before what was done. The box edits the video, not what is inside a picture: to swap a product or change a scene, use Change it with words on that shot, and the box offers a button that opens it with your words filled in. Undo this change puts it back, and thumbs up or down rates the result.

Infinity effects are aiKit's own pack of effects in Video Kit, drawn with the aiKit infinity mark in gold, coral and violet, free on every plan. Transitions: ∞ Loop (a glowing ∞ draws on, fills the frame at the cut and unwinds off the next shot), ∞ Portal (the next shot opens through an ∞-shaped window) and ∞ Comet. Effects: ∞ Light trail, ∞ Sparkle loop, and ∞ Signature, a small ∞ that draws itself in the corner now and then. Open the Effects tab and pick the ∞ Signature pack, or ask "∞ Loop between every clip".

Yes. Open the Effects tab: every preset is a small moving preview. Transitions play across the cut between two pieces (24 of them: Lightning, Flash, Dip to black, Glitch, Zoom punch, Whip pan, Spin, Impact, Shutter, Circle, Brand wipe, Light leak, Film burn, Pixelate, Roll up, Pull back, Blur, RGB split, Light sweep, Blinds, Diagonal wipe, Heart, Star, Split) on every cut or one cut. Effects play over the whole video or one piece (28 of them: Lightning storm, Sparkles, Confetti, Snow, Rain, Hearts, Bokeh lights, Light leaks, Dreamy glow, VHS tape, Old film, Film grain, Vignette, Cinema bars, Handheld, Slow zoom, Beat pulse, Neon frame, Fireworks, Bubbles, Money rain, Fog, Lens flare, Glitchy, Color fringe, Retro TV, Floating dust, Shine), up to 6 at once. They show in the preview and the exported video alike, under your captions. You can also ask: "lightning between every clip".

Yes. Versions (next to Save) keeps named copies of your edit: save one before trying something new, Open it to go back (what's on screen is saved as a version first), or Make it its own video to change it separately. To swap footage, select a piece on the timeline and press Replace clip: the new clip takes the same place and length, and its captions are made automatically. Extra pictures and clips have Replace too, and the Sound tab replaces the music.

Yes. In Video Kit's Captions tab, Spoken language says what language people speak in your clips (20 languages, or Auto); change it and the words are written down again in that language. Show captions in translates the captions into another language, such as Spanish, French, Hebrew, or Chinese, and they still move with the voice. The words you edit stay in the spoken language, and Same as spoken goes back. You can also type "put the captions in Spanish" in the Ask for any change box.

Open the Text & stickers tab, type the words (for example "Spring tune-up $49" or your phone number), and press Add to the video or Enter. The text appears where you are in the video for 3 seconds and the video jumps there so you can see it. Change when it starts, how long it shows, the box behind it (none, dark, light, brand, or a button), and its size, or drag it on the video to move it. Long text shrinks to fit. You can also ask: "show our phone number at the end".

Yes. In Video Kit's Text & stickers tab, each line of words has Where, a 3 × 3 grid of spots, and Motion: Glide to a spot, Float, Drift side to side, Circle around, Grow and shrink, Pulse, Shake, or Scroll across (ticker). A glide travels from where the words sit to the spot you pick under Ends at, or pause the video and drag the dashed Ends here box for any spot, with a Smooth, Bouncy, or Quick feel. Plays sets Once, 2, 3 or 5 times, or The whole time the words show. These are the same moves as Motion Maker. You can also ask in plain words, like "make the price glide to the bottom".

Yes. Select a video piece on the timeline: Speed sets 0.25× to 4×; Speed changes makes the speed ease across the piece (Slows down, Speeds up, Fast then normal, Normal then slow); Slow-motion moment and Speed burst ease into slow or fast motion right at the playhead and back out; and Freeze the last frame holds the last picture for up to 3 seconds. Captions follow the new timing. The piece's sound plays at the new speed, or untick Keep this piece's sound for a silent slow-motion shot. You can also ask: "make the second clip slow motion" or "freeze the end for 2 seconds".

In Captions, pick one of twelve Caption looks (Bold pop, Clean, Karaoke, Neon, Boxed, Typewriter, Big word, Bouncy, Underline, Minimal, Hype, Retro wave) or choose how the words move yourself: highlight, word in a box, plain, fill as spoken, appear as spoken, bounce in, type on, glow, underline sweep, wave, or one big word. Make key words pop shows numbers, prices and names bigger in the highlight color, and Add emoji puts an emoji after words like pizza 🍕 or call 📞. Words on screen (the Text tab) get a font, letters (shadow, outline, glow, 3D, neon, gradient, retro), 12 ways to come in (pop, fade, slide, zoom, drop and bounce, spin, flip, type it out, word by word…) and 9 ways to go out.

Yes. Open the Text & stickers tab. Under Stickers, emoji and arrows pick Emoji (48 popular ones, or type any emoji), Shapes (arrow, curved arrow, circle it, underline, box it, check, cross, star, burst badge, heart, speech bubble, sparkle; the lines draw themselves on), Graphics (anything in your Graphics Library) or Logos (your Logo Kit logos). Each sticker can be sized, turned, recolored (shapes), placed with a spot grid or by dragging, brought in and out with the same effects as words, and moved: glide along a path with up to 6 stops, float, drift, pulse and more. Or ask: "circle the price in red" or "put a fire emoji next to it".

Yes. In the Captions tab, Zoom in on key words (Subtle or Punchy) punches the camera in each time a number, a price, a strong selling word like free or new, or a name is said, then eases back out, at most once every 1.6 seconds. It needs the words (captions) to be made. You can also ask: "zoom in when I say the price".

Yes. In the Effects tab, choose where the next effect plays: Here plays it from the playhead for 1 to 8 seconds; Repeat plays it at every cut between clips, or every 2, 3, 5 or 10 seconds; Piece plays it for one clip; Whole video plays it all the way through. Clicking a tile plays the video from just before that moment so you see it at once. You can also ask: "fireworks at the end", "sparkles every 5 seconds", or "an infinity between every clip". Transitions need two clips; with one, it says Add a second clip to see transitions.

Pick Templates for your business, choose your industry and a template, and it starts with its own photos, words, transitions, music and closing card, ready to play. Each photo is marked Your photo here: click it to swap in your own photo or clip, and the words stay on it. If you already have clips, you choose Start this template or Use its look on my clips. Back returns you to the template picker. Moving effects templates (marked with a gold Moving effects tag) also put moving light, fog, sparkle and slow camera moves on every shot, and each shot has a Make your photo move button that opens Scene Studio to turn your own photo into a real moving shot.

You choose. When your clips have their own sound, adding music asks: Mix it with the music (your voices stay and the music dips under them) or Replace it with the music (your clips go silent; each piece's Volume brings its sound back).

Yes. In Export, under How many times it plays, an MP4 or WebM can play once or 2, 3, 4, 5 or 10 times in a row as one longer file (the sound repeats with it). A GIF can play over and over forever, once, or 2, 3, 5 or 10 times. Most social apps loop a video on their own, so pick Once for Reels and TikTok unless you want the repeats inside the file.

Editing happens in your browser from the files on your computer, so it starts at once. In the background, each clip is copied to the cloud in parts, picking up where it stopped after a dropped connection or a reload, so a saved video opens on any device where you sign in. Free keeps the footage of your last 3 videos for 30 days; paid plans keep more. Finished videos are saved to your Graphics Library (files up to 25 MB) or downloaded. For captions, only the sound is sent, never the footage.

Video Kit takes MP4, MOV, M4V, WebM, MKV, AVI, 3GP, MPEG and WMV video; JPG, PNG, WebP, AVIF, GIF, BMP and HEIC pictures; and MP3, M4A, AAC, WAV, OGG, Opus, FLAC and AIFF sound (a file this browser can't open gets a note saying to convert it). It exports MP4 or WebM video, a GIF for email (up to 15 seconds), the sound only as WAV, or a still PNG. Sizes: 9:16, 1:1, 4:5 and 16:9 one click away, More sizes for 4K, 1440p, Pinterest, link previews and email GIFs, and any custom size from 240 to 4096 pixels a side.

Yes. In Video Kit, My videos → Templates → Save this edit as a template keeps the size, captions, color look, intro and outro, logo, music and words on screen (never your clips). Use a template to start a new video with that look, or to restyle the one you're editing. Any saved video or template can be duplicated.

Yes. In Video Kit, press Mark up, then circle, draw, point with an arrow, or drop a pin on the paused video, and type what should change. Each note becomes a task: press Fix it (or Fix all) and Video Kit makes the change, then marks the note Fixed with what was done, or Not done yet with the reason. A notice tells you when the fixes are finished.

Yes. From a Presentation Builder deck, Video Kit makes a video with one piece per slide, drawn in the deck's theme at the video's size. Voice Kit reads the speaker notes aloud, each slide lasts as long as its part of the narration, and captions come from the script. Then edit it like any video: change the size, add music or an intro, ask for any change, and export the MP4. Without Voice Kit switched on, the slides get a reading length each and Video Kit says so.

Yes. Select the piece on the timeline and press Follow the face: Video Kit finds the face through the clip in your browser, using open-source face detection, and moves the frame smoothly to keep it in view. If no face is found, drag the picture on the video to frame it by hand.

Yes. In Video Kit's Brand tab, turn on an Intro card or Outro card and pick one of Motion Maker's animation styles, a headline, and a second line or button; add your logo in the corner and a color look (black and white, warm, vivid, and more). In the Sound tab, pick an aiKit Original or your own music: it dips under the voice by itself while someone talks.

Yes: Pro Designer at aikit.ai/tools/pro-designer. It has Photoshop's layout and shortcuts (menu bar, toolbar, options bar, rulers, Layers, History, Properties and Adjustments panels) and its core tools: layers with masks, clipping masks, blend modes and styles; adjustment layers; marquee, lasso, magic wand and Select Subject; brush, eraser, gradient and paint bucket; clone stamp, healing and spot healing; dodge, burn and sponge; Levels, Curves, Hue/Saturation and more; the Filter menu; Free Transform with skew, distort and perspective; crop, image size and canvas size. Everything runs in your browser.

It opens PNG, JPG, WebP, GIF, BMP, TIFF, ICO, AVIF, SVG, PDF, Illustrator files saved with PDF content, PSD, and HEIC photos in Safari. Save As… (⇧⌘S) saves JPG, PNG, WebP, AVIF, GIF, ICO, PDF (with bleed and crop marks for print), CMYK PDF, TIFF, CMYK TIFF, BMP, PSD with layers, a separate project copy, and Vector PDF and SVG with text and shapes as vector outlines. You choose the resolution, from 72 to 1,200 ppi or any number up to 2,400; 300 is print quality. JPG, PNG and PDF are also one click at the top right.

Draw a box with the Marquee (or Elliptical Marquee for a circle), then press Place picture here in the bar under the picture, or ＋ Place at the top right. Pick Inside my box, then a photo from your computer, the free photo search, your Graphics Library or an AI picture. The photo fills the box like a frame; drag it with the Move tool to choose which part shows, and press ⌘T to make it bigger or smaller. Page background instead fills the whole page behind everything.

Yes. Save As (⇧⌘S) shows the real saved file and its size before you download it. Pick Small, Medium, Large or Maximum, or set the details: JPG, WebP and PDF quality, PNG full color or 256 to 16 colors, GIF colors, TIFF ZIP compression, transparency on or off, and the image size in pixels or a resolution up to 2,400 ppi.

Yes. Automate (File > Automate, or /tools/pro-designer/automate) runs the same steps on many files: drop PDFs, Illustrator, PSD, JPG, PNG or TIFF files, say what to do ("add a 1/16 inch bleed and save as PDF") or pick a ready-made recipe, and download them all in one ZIP or straight into a folder. A 2.5 × 3.5 inch card comes back as card_2.625x3.625_bleed.pdf, with mirrored edges for the bleed, the text still vector and a TrimBox for the printer. Other steps: exact sizes, scale, resolution, CMYK or grayscale, rotate, crop, trim, logo and words on every file. You can save your own automations.

Pick Shapes (U) and drag, or draw a box with the Rectangular Marquee (M) and press Make it a box. With the box selected, the bar under the picture sets the fill color (or a gradient, or no fill), the outline color and thickness, round corners, and one-click effects such as Drop shadow, Glow, Neon, Outline and Sticker. Outline… and Fill… also work on any selection.

Yes. Save As… > Vector PDF or SVG saves text and shapes (including Pen tool paths) as vector outlines that stay sharp at any size, ready for Illustrator, print shops and cutting machines. The text is converted to outlines, so the file looks right without the font installed. Photos, painting and effects inside are saved as pictures in their place, at the resolution you pick. CMYK documents get CMYK colors in the Vector PDF.

Yes. The New document window sets width and height in pixels, inches, centimeters, millimeters, points or picas, portrait or landscape, a resolution in pixels per inch or per centimeter, and a color mode: RGB, CMYK (shows print-safe colors and exports CMYK PDF and TIFF), Grayscale, Bitmap (pure black and white) or Lab. Print sizes get 1/8 inch of bleed, which you can change (none, 3 mm, 5 mm, 1/4 inch or any amount), plus optional safe margins and a column grid as guides. It shows the final pixel size and file size before you create it, and you can save your own sizes as presets.

Yes. Pro Designer opens PSDs with their layers, groups, masks, opacity, blend modes and clipping, and exports PSDs the same way. Text and shapes are saved as pictures, and adjustment layers are saved with their effect applied. You can also save a project in aiKit with every layer still editable.

Yes. Type or dictate any change under the picture, like “make the sky bluer and remove the sign on the left”. aiKit looks at the picture and uses the editor's own tools (selections, adjustment layers, filters, text, Generative Fill). Anything it couldn't do is listed first under Not done yet, and Undo this puts everything back.

Yes. Select an area, press Generative Fill and describe what should be there, or leave it empty to remove what's there. The result is added on its own layer, masked to your selection and color-matched to the photo around it, so nothing outside the selection changes and it's easy to adjust or delete. It takes 15 to 40 seconds and uses a little token (about 5¢).

Yes. In Pro Designer, brush over the object with the Remove tool (J), or select it (the Object Selection tool selects anything you click) and press Remove. It's filled from the surroundings on your own device, so it uses no token. Auto straighten, white balance, skin smoothing, denoise, sky replacement, match color, recolor to brand colors and resizing for every social size are free and on-device too.

Yes. In Pro Designer, Image > Make Text Editable rebuilds every word in the open picture as a real text layer in the closest Google font, sized, colored and placed over the original, and removes the old words from the picture underneath (with AI, or free on your device). Design Contest's Make text editable button opens a concept this way. It tells you what didn't match exactly: curved or logo lettering left in the picture, effects like outlines that aren't rebuilt (shadows and glows come back as layer styles), and how closely each font matches. Reading the words uses a little token.

In Pro Designer, press ✦ Change background (or Image > Change Background). You get six AI background ideas made for your design's topic (only the one you click is made, using a little token), free stock photos already searched for that topic, a Restyle tab that gives the same picture a new look while keeping its layout, and My photo for your own picture. The new background goes under your text layers as its own layer and the old one is kept, hidden. To swap one thing in a photo, use Change something in the picture: click it, then pick a suggested replacement, describe one, or remove it for free.

Magic Canvas makes a finished design fast: pick a size or describe it in a sentence and AI lays it out. Pro Designer is the Photoshop-style tool for real photo editing and detailed design work: brushes, masks, selections, retouching, adjustments, filters and PSD files.

Yes, in Magic Canvas (aikit.ai/tools/magic-canvas). Pick a size by what it's for (social, print, web or email, or any custom size), or describe the design in a sentence and aiKit lays it out as real layers. Then add text with 31 fonts, shapes, photos from your computer, your Graphics Library or AI, and your brand colors and logos from Logo Kit. Change anything by hand or by typing the change in your own words. Download PNG, JPG, print-ready PDF or SVG, or save it to your Graphics Library. Editing is free; only AI layouts, AI changes and AI pictures use token.

Yes. Print sizes (in inches) are built at 300 dpi with 1/8 inch of bleed on every side. The editor shows the cut line and a safe area for words; Download as PDF makes a print file with the bleed, the trim size set in the file, and crop marks you can turn off.

The photo tools and Magic effects are free and run on your own device: Auto-enhance (it measures the photo and fixes light and color), Brighten colors, eight color looks (Teal & orange, Golden hour, Film, Matte, Cinematic, Pastel, Noir, Pop), duotone in your brand colors, portrait blur, color splash, sticker cut-out, remove background, Enlarge 2×, sharpen, film grain, pixel art, plus brightness, contrast, saturation, warmth, blur, filters, crop and shape masks. Only AI pictures and AI layouts or changes use token.

Yes. Type or dictate any change under the page, like “make the background darker and move the logo to the top right” or “give the photo a film look”. aiKit changes your real layers and lists anything it couldn't do first, under Not done yet, with the reason. Undo this AI change puts everything back.

Yes. Add up to 6 pictures in Assets (or under Describe it on the start screen): drop them, paste them, upload them or pick them from your Graphics Library, and mark each as a Logo, Photo, Product, or Style to match. aiKit really looks at each picture with every request: your logo and photos go into the design, and a Style to match picture isn't placed but its colors, type feel, layout and mood are copied. Uploads are saved to your Graphics Library.

Yes. History keeps every moment of the design: every AI request, every round of changes by hand (saved on its own about 20 seconds after you stop), and every time something was brought back, with a picture, your words, exactly what aiKit was asked, and what changed. Moments stay with the design when you reopen it, up to 500 per design, and named versions are always kept. Name this version marks a point you want to find again, like “Sent to the client”, and the Named filter shows only those. Compare any moment with now, or any two moments, side by side or with a slider, with a What changed list for each layer; bring back the whole design or just one part, like the old headline, while everything else stays as it is now. Start a new design from any moment, or use its fonts and colors on your next request.

Yes. Versions → Make versions asks for 2 to 6 versions in your own words, such as “3 flyers for different audiences” or “a square post, a story and a banner”, or a few takes on just the selected headline. Each version is its own editable design with its own history, saved next to the original, and Compare all shows them side by side so you can pick one and keep going. Duplicate makes a straight copy to take in a new direction.

Yes. Save design keeps every layer. Reopen it from My designs on the Magic Canvas start screen; each design also has its own link. Photos you added are stored in your Graphics Library so the design opens anywhere.

Reviews & customer photos is aiKit's tool for getting more honest reviews and real job photos from your customers. You add customers one at a time or paste a list, and each one gets a short request a few days after the job (you pick the wait), with up to two reminders. Each customer has a private review page that works on a phone with no account: five stars, a few words, your Google review link, and a place to share photos or a short video of the finished work. You see who opened the request, who visited their page, who reviewed, and who pressed Post on Google. Reviews and photos land in an Inbox where you reply, keep them private, or publish them to your aiKit website's reviews wall. For example, a made-up remodeling company could ask every customer three days after each job and show the best-photographed kitchens on its site. Open it from the Tool library or at aikit.ai/tools/reviews.

No, and it can't be set up to. That practice is called review gating, and Google's rules don't allow it. Every customer gets the same email and the same review page, and the Post on Google button is on the page for everyone, before and after they rate, whatever they rate. The answer after sending a review is identical for one star and five. Every customer can also leave a private note, and that option is offered to everyone too. When you save your request wording, aiKit checks it and refuses wording that asks only happy customers, asks for a star count or a positive review, or tells unhappy customers to contact you instead.

No. Paying for reviews, in money, discounts, tokens, gifts, or prize entries, breaks Google's rules and the FTC's rule on consumer reviews, so aiKit won't save or send request wording that offers one. You can offer a thank-you for photos of the finished job, set in Settings. It's shown to everyone who shares photos, whether or not they review and whatever they rate, and it can't mention reviews or ratings.

Google's review link is built from your listing's Place ID. In Reviews > Settings, paste your Place ID (it usually starts with ChIJ; Google's free Place ID Finder shows it when you search your business) or paste a Google review link you already have, and aiKit pulls the ID out. Press "Check it opens your listing" to confirm it opens your own write-a-review page. Every customer then gets that same one-tap link.

Yes. The Requests tab has six count tiles: Scheduled, Sent, Opened, Clicked, Reviewed, and Went to Google. Press any tile to see exactly those customers. Opened comes from a tiny picture in the email, so a mail app that blocks pictures won't count until they click. Clicked means they opened their review page; some company mail filters open links on their own, so it can run a little high. Reviewed is the one only a person can do. Went to Google counts the button press, since Google doesn't tell anyone whether a review was posted. Each customer's details show their full history.

Not to start. Until email is set up for your account, nothing is emailed, and the page says so. Every customer's private review link is ready to copy, so you can text or email it yourself, and everything they send still lands in your Inbox and counts. Once email is set up, scheduled requests from the last 30 days go out on their own.

Add the Reviews & customer photos module to your aiKit website from its Kit tab and choose that site in Reviews > Settings. The wall shows the reviews you published (only ones the customer said OK to show), your replies under them, names as first name and last initial, a photo and video gallery, and your Google review link. The average covers the reviews shown there, so the number always matches what visitors can read. It lists newest first, never by rating, and updates within a minute of each publish with no rebuild.

Not for a service business, on purpose. Google doesn't show review stars for reviews a business collects about itself on its own site (its guidelines call these self-serving reviews of a LocalBusiness or Organization), so marking them up earns nothing and can be treated as spammy markup. The wall adds no review markup in that case. If every review is about one product you sell, enter the product's name in Settings and the wall marks up those reviews, only the ones visible on the page and only ones collected through your aiKit review pages, as reviews of that product. Reviews from Google or other sites are never copied in.

Yes. Reviews > Settings > Your public review page gives you one link for anyone (aikit.ai/review-us/…) and a QR code to download for business cards, receipts, invoices, or the counter. The page asks "Where did you find us?" and moves that review site to the top, with your Google link first by default; add ?src=google, ?src=facebook, or ?src=nextdoor to the link to choose ahead of time, for example on a card handed out after Google searches. It also has a review form, a private message box shown to everyone, and photo sharing. Yelp doesn't allow asking for reviews, so it only shows as Find us on Yelp. What comes in lands in your Inbox marked From your public page, and nothing is public until you publish it.

Yes. When you mark a Quote Studio job Done, its customer is added to Reviews and asked after your usual wait (Settings > Timing), the same way as everyone else; Quote Studio's note says "Review request scheduled." Completed bookings work the same way. Turn it off with "Ask automatically when a Quote Studio job is marked Done" in Settings. Add customers > From finished jobs lists Done jobs whose customer isn't on your list yet, for catching up on older work. Each request remembers its quote and client, so the customer's details link to the quote and the client's page shows a Reviews card. A customer already on your list is never asked twice, and your own and test addresses are skipped.

Yes. Set Most requests in a day in Reviews > Settings > Timing. Once that many requests and reminders went out today, the rest wait for tomorrow, in order, and the Requests tab shows how many are left today and who is up next. A few dozen a day keeps your email looking like normal mail and spreads replies out so you can answer each one. To see the email first, press Email me a test in Settings: it goes only to your own account address, marked [TEST].

Yes. In the Reviews Inbox, press Add a review you got. Enter their name, the stars they gave, their words as they said them, where it came from (phone, email, a card, in person, text), the date, and optionally a photo they sent and whether they said it's OK to show on your website. You confirm these are a real customer's own words, since reviews you write yourself or pay for break Google's rules and the FTC's rule. It's marked Added by you and starts in Needs a look like any other review.

Yes. When you publish a customer's photo to your website from the Reviews Inbox, it's also saved to your Graphics Library in the Customer photos folder, tagged customer photo, so your other aiKit tools and websites can use it. Save to Graphics Library does the same without publishing. Only photos the customer said OK to show can go there.

New reviews with links, keyboard mashing, strings of one letter, common spam words, or a filled hidden form field go to the Spam view with the reason shown. Nothing is deleted on its own and nothing published is ever touched; short real reviews like "Great job!" aren't treated as spam. Move anything back with Not spam, or empty the Spam view for good. Spam never counts in your average. A real review can only be deleted when the customer asked you to remove it.

Customer Proofs is aiKit's tool for getting a clear yes on a design before it goes out. It works for any business and any design, not just printing: a menu, a storefront sign, an ad, a logo, a flyer, or a web page mockup. You add a PDF, PNG, JPG, WEBP, GIF, or SVG, a video (MP4, MOV, WEBM), or audio (MP3, WAV, M4A) (or pick a version you made in Printer’s Helper), send it to one or more people, and each person gets a private link that opens on a phone or computer with no account. They can zoom in, pin comments on the exact spot, and either approve by ticking a short checklist and typing their name, or ask for changes. You see who opened it, who approved, and what they want changed, all filed by client. For example, a made-up restaurant like Maple Street Bakery could send its new menu to the owner and the manager and know exactly when both signed off. Open it from the Tool library or at aikit.ai/tools/proofs.

Yes. In the Send window, paste a whole list of email addresses at once; commas, semicolons, and new lines all work, and a red chip flags any address that doesn't look right. Give each person a role: Approver (says yes or asks for changes), Can comment (pins and notes only), or FYI (just looks). Then choose whether any one approver's yes is enough or every approver has to say yes. Each person gets their own private link, so every comment and approval carries their name, and the approval saves their typed signature and the time. On the proof you see each person as Sent, Opened, Approved, or Changes, with Copy link, Send again, and Remind buttons. People you've sent to before are remembered for each client and offered in one tap next time. Up to 25 people can be on one proof.

Yes. In Customer Proofs, press New proof and add an MP4, MOV, WEBM, MP3, WAV, or M4A file up to 150 MB, about 2 minutes of 1080p video or hours of MP3 audio. Your customer opens their private link on a phone or computer with no account and watches or listens right on the page. They press Comment at 0:42 to leave a note at that exact moment, mark In and Out to comment on a stretch such as 0:08 to 0:11, and on video can draw a box, an arrow, or a line on the paused frame. Each comment is a numbered marker on the timeline, and pressing it jumps the player there. They approve with a typed-name signature or ask for changes, the same as a design proof. For example, a made-up shop like Maple Street Bakery could send its 30-second radio spot to the owner and see exactly which second needs a change. MP4 (H.264) plays in every browser; export newer iPhone MOV files as MP4.

Open the proof in Customer Proofs and press CSV at the top of Comments. The file lists every comment and reply in time order with its start and end time, both as 0:42 and in seconds, who wrote it, whether it has a box, arrow, or drawing, and whether it's marked done, so you can work down it in Premiere, Resolve, or Final Cut, or open it in Excel or Google Sheets. PDF opens a printable list with the poster frame and every comment; choose Save as PDF in the print window. Each comment also has its own link that opens the proof at that exact moment. Version 2 can then be compared with version 1 side by side or by switching between them at the same moment.

Your customer opens their link and picks a tool above the proof: Pin, Box, Circle, Arrow, Pen, Highlighter, or Text. A pin or a text note goes where they tap; a box, circle, or arrow is a drag (a tap makes one at a sensible size, which helps on a phone); the pen and highlighter follow their finger or mouse. They pick a color, then type what should change, such as "make this phone number bigger." Every mark gets a number on the art and in the Comments list, with the person's name and the time, and Undo takes back the mark being drawn or their newest one until someone answers it. Typing @ and a name mentions another person on the proof, who gets an email with their own link. Anyone can reply in a mark's thread and press Mark done or Open again. On a PDF with several pages, the page strip shows how many marks each page has, and Comments switches between This page and All comments; picking one jumps to its mark.

Open the proof and press Upload new version. Add the new file and write what changed in a sentence or two, such as "bigger phone number, darker green." The Send window then opens with the same people already in it and your note filled in, so one press of Send gets version 2 to everyone on the same link they already have. Your customers see "What changed in version 2" at the top, version tabs to look back at earlier versions, Compare with version 1, which shows the old and new side by side, zooming together (on a phone it switches between the two), and Show what changed, which fades everything that stayed the same and draws a box around each area that changed. Approvals start over for each version, so a yes on version 1 never counts as a yes on version 2. The timeline on the proof records every version, send, open, comment, and signed approval, and Approval record turns it into one printable page with each person's typed signature and the exact time.

When email is set up for your account, Send emails each person their own link. The email shows your logo or business name at the top (from your Shop profile), your personal note, and the answer-by date, and replies come straight to you; aiKit shows only as a small line at the bottom. With a due date set, you can turn on reminders: each approver who hasn't answered gets one reminder the day before and one on the day. You also get an email when someone approves (with their signature and how many approvals are in) or asks for changes (with their note and pins). Until email is switched on for your account, Send still makes every link and shows a Copy link button for each person, so you can send them yourself by email or text. Each link is for one person only, so send it just to them.

Yes. On any website project, press Send proof in the project's header, on the Versions tab, or on the review screen. The same Send proof drawer opens with the client already filled in. Pick which copy of the site to send (the draft waiting for Publish, the live site, or, before Go live, the current version), the whole site or just the pages you're working on (up to 8), and desktop, phone, or both. aiKit takes a full-page picture of each page at each width from that exact version, and your client gets them in the proof room to page through, switch between desktop and phone, and mark up, plus Click through the live preview: the same version as a working site in a new tab, with forms turned off. Request changes puts each mark on the project's Feedback tab with its page and spot; Approve records a signed approval on that site version and never publishes. Customer Proofs lists these with a Website badge.

Yes. On a proof in Customer Proofs, press Turn comments into a change list. It lists every mark and note your customer left on that version, numbered like the art and grouped by page, in their own words, with who wrote it and how many replies it has. Tick one when it's made and it shows as done on your customer's page too. On a video or audio proof the comments are listed under Timeline in time order, each with its moment or range. Copy the list pastes it as plain text into a message or a task app, Download CSV saves every comment and reply for a spreadsheet, and Download PDF report (also on the Comments card) makes a PDF of the pages that have marks, with every box, arrow, drawing, and number drawn on the art, followed by the full numbered list with replies and whether each is done or open. Notes only your team sees are never in the list or the report. For a website proof, the same changes are also waiting on the project's Feedback tab.

Each link is a long random code made for one person, so it can't be guessed, and proof pages are never listed in search engines. The page shows your business name and logo, the design, and the comments with first names only; it never shows email addresses, your account, your other jobs, or your other customers. Anyone holding a person's link can act as that person, so send it only to them. You can set links to stop working after 7, 14, or 30 days when you send, and extend or remove the limit any time in the proof's Settings. An expired link still opens but says it expired and doesn't take answers. Taking a person off the proof stops their link at once, and deleting a proof removes its files and every link for good. An approval is a sign-off on the proof, not a signed contract.

Open Quotes at aikit.ai/tools/quotes. Pick the company the quote is from, paste the customer's email or the scope of work and specs into the big box (or type it, say it with the microphone, or add a PDF, photo, Word file or saved email), optionally write your prices in your own words, like "cards $48 per 250, design $85/hr", and press Make the quote. In a few seconds the finished one-page quote appears beside the form, laid out exactly like the PDF: your logo and contact details, the customer, each line with its quantity, price and amount, a specification with the details of every line, what's included, a note to the customer, how to pay and your terms. Click any line on it to change the description, quantity, price or details, then Download PDF, Copy link (a page your customer can accept online) or Send.

No. Prices come only from what you gave it: the prices you type with the scope, your company's products and price list, the products and services you saved, and lines from that company's past quotes. A price that isn't written anywhere is left empty and the line shows Price needed in yellow; the quote can't be downloaded, linked or sent until you click it and type the price. It also never adds add-ons, warranties, maintenance visits, training or anything else the scope didn't ask for.

Yes. After a quote is made at aikit.ai/tools/quotes, type or say any change in Change this quote in your words, like "add a $40 rush fee and drop the setup fee", "make the note friendlier", "split line 2 into 300 and 200" or "give a 10% discount", and press Make the change. It changes the quote as it is now and keeps everything else. The answer lists anything it did not do first, under Not done yet, with the reason (a price you didn't give stays Price needed; something a quote can't hold, like delivery by drone, is said plainly), then the changes it really made, measured by comparing the quote before and after, including the new total. Prices are only ever ones you wrote, ones already on the quote, or your saved and past prices. Undo this change puts the quote back as it was before the last change.

Yes. Quote from, at the top of the quote form, switches between your companies, and + Add a company… adds another (up to 20 per account). Each company has its own logo (uploaded, or picked from your Graphics Library), name, address, phone, email, website, terms, payment line, dark or light page style, price color and quote number sequence, so a quote from one company never shows another's details. Switching the company on a quote you already made moves it to the other company with that company's next number.

Under More options, below the form, so the first screen stays short. Show FREE SHIPPING on the quote prints a green free-shipping band under the prices. Discount (% off or $ off) prints a discount row under the subtotal, Sales tax % adds tax on the discounted amount, and Deposit to start % prints the deposit due under the total. Good for (days) sets the Valid through date, Turnaround prints the lead time, and Terms for this quote replaces the terms line. Show the lines as options the customer picks from turns the quote into Good / Better / Best options; it is off unless you turn it on.

Quote Studio is aiKit's tool for sending quotes and estimates that customers accept online. You build a quote from lines with a quantity, unit, price, discount, and tax, add optional extras and pick-one choices (like Good, Better, Best), set a deposit percent and a good-until date, and send it. Your customer opens a private link on their phone or computer, with no account, sees your logo, switches extras on and off while the total updates, and accepts by typing their name and agreeing to your terms. They can also decline with a reason, ask a question, or download a PDF. For example, a made-up cleaning company could quote a move-out clean with an optional window wash and three carpet options, and know the moment the customer accepted and which options they picked. Open it from the Tool library or at aikit.ai/tools/quotes.

Yes. In Quote Studio, press From a request. It lists the newest quote requests from the quote forms on websites you own or build. Press Quote this and the quote starts with the customer's name, email, phone, and address, a first line for what they asked for (with the quantity and options they picked in the quote builder), and their notes. Their photos and files are copied onto the quote for you to see; they never show on the customer's page. If your website showed them a price estimate, it goes in your private note so you can price the job against it.

Yes. Each line is Included, an Optional add-on, or part of a Pick one choice. Optional add-ons appear on the customer's page with a checkbox, and pick-one choices appear as cards where they choose exactly one. The total, tax, and deposit change as they pick. When they accept, aiKit works the total out again from the quote you sent, never from their browser, and saves exactly which options they chose, their typed name, and the time. You see What they picked on the accepted quote, and Convert to job carries those lines over.

A sent version is locked, so the customer's page always matches what they were sent. Press Start version 2 to make a copy you can edit; your customer keeps seeing version 1 until you send version 2. Compare shows every line added, removed, or changed with the old and new prices, plus changes to the deposit, tax, expiry date, notes, or terms, and the total before and after. When you send the new version, a what-changed note is already written from that comparison, and the customer sees it in the email. Every version keeps its own PDF.

Yes. Each person you send it to has four steps on the quote: Sent, Opened email, Clicked, and Viewed quote, each with how long ago, and the Activity list records every open, view, question, and answer with the time. Automatic reminders go out on day 2, 5, and 10 after sending (you can change the days) and stop the moment the customer accepts, declines, or asks a question, or when the quote expires. Emails and reminders go out once email is set up for your account; until then nothing is emailed, the quote page still works, and Copy link gives you each person's link to send yourself by email or text.

No. Quote Studio never charges your customer. If you set a deposit percent, the quote page, the PDF, and the accepted quote show the deposit as an amount. You can add payment instructions and your own payment link (from your own invoicing or checkout service) in Settings or on each quote; after your customer accepts, their quote page shows a Pay button to that link. aiKit never handles the money. When a quote is accepted, Convert to job makes a job with the accepted total and the deposit to collect.

Yes. In Quote Studio, the Request form tab lists the questions your website's quote form asks, starting with the five it already asks. Add, edit, reorder, and remove questions, mark each one Needed or Optional, and pick the answer type: short or long answer, pick one, pick any, a list, number, date, yes or no, photos, or a file upload. Show only if hides a question until an earlier answer matches, like asking how many rooms only for interior painting. A live preview shows the form as your customer sees it. Answers arrive with each request and fill the quote when you press Quote this. The same form also has its own page you can text or email.

Yes to both. Your customer accepts by typing their full name (their signature) and can also draw a signature with a finger or mouse; the drawn signature shows on the accepted quote and its PDF. For options, Good / Better / Best turns a quote into three options: AI help suggests what each adds from your saved products and services (it never makes up prices), or you set them up by hand. The customer picks one on their quote page, and the PDF shows the three side by side with a total each.

Yes. In Quote Studio Settings, Brands lets you add brands, each with its own name, logo, colors, contact details, quote number prefix, terms, and payment wording. Every quote picks its brand, and its page, email, and PDF carry that brand.

Yes. The Products & services tab in Quote Studio holds your saved list: a name, details, a unit, a price, your own cost (only you see it, for your margin), tax, a picture, and options that change the price, like Size or Finish. On a quote, Add from your list adds any of them in a tap with the options and quantity you choose.

Yes. In Quote Studio, the Set up guide's third step takes up to 10 past quotes as PDFs, screenshots, photos, Word or Excel files. aiKit reads the products and prices they show, how you word your intro, notes, scope and terms, your terms and how customers pay, and notes about your customers and typical jobs. You tick what to keep: products go to Products & services, wording goes to Saved text, payment details fill in how customers pay, and the business notes are what the quote AI reads when it drafts for you. Bank, card and account numbers are never kept.

In Quote Studio's Set up guide, step 4, tick the ways you take payment (credit card, check, ACH / bank transfer, cash, PayPal, Zelle, Venmo) or type your own. aiKit writes the sentence customers see on every new quote, and you can change it. You can also add a payment link, which shows a Pay button after the customer accepts. Never put bank account numbers in the quote; send those privately.

Yes. In Quote Studio, Products & services, Import prices reads an Excel or CSV price sheet, a PDF or a photo of a price chart, a product page (including dropdown price calculators, which it tries one combination at a time without ever adding to a cart), a category page of products, or pasted prices. The AI builds each product with its options, quantities, price chart, add-ons, setup charges, turnaround and file requirements, then every price from your source is priced again and shown side by side, with anything that doesn't match listed first. You can change anything in plain words before saving, and a saved product from a web page can be checked later for price changes.

Yes. In Products & services, set an item to Price rules and start from a ready setup for your kind of business: business cards with price breaks, flyers by size and quantity, banners by the square foot, screen printing with setup per color, embroidery by stitch count, promotional mugs and pens with quantity columns, setup and run charges, candles with their own price per size and a case discount, house cleaning by size and rooms, hourly service calls, and catering per guest. Change every number to yours and check it in the test calculator. When you add the item to a quote, the price is worked out with every line shown in the details, and items without price rules keep working as before.

Yes, for items with price rules. When you add one from your list, Extra discount for this customer takes a percent off the price that quantity already gets, never off the list price, and the quote says the total percent off the list price. Let the customer pick the quantity puts each of the item's quantity columns on the quote as a pick-one choice with its price per piece, and the customer's pick sets their total.

Yes. Each line can carry a picture, and the Details step takes attachments (PDFs, pictures, Office documents, and drawings up to 4 MB each) and web links. Your customer opens or downloads them from their quote page, and the PDF lists them. A file stays private until you send a version that includes it.

Quote Studio has optional AI help: draft lines from a customer's request and write the intro and scope of work. It never suggests add-ons or services you didn't save. It never makes up prices. Prices come only from your saved products and services; any other suggested line arrives at $0.00 marked Set the price, and a quantity the customer didn't give is marked Check how many. Nothing is added to the quote until you press Add, and each use costs about one or two cents of AI time, counted against your plan's tokens like every other aiKit tool.

Yes. At aikit.ai/tools/quotes, pick the company, paste the customer's email, write what to quote in your own words (like "10 x 30W, extra 4% off") in Your prices / notes, and press Make the quote. The AI fills in the customer, the products, the quantities and the job's facts, lists any question that still needs an answer, and writes a note to the customer by first name. It never sets a price: every price comes from your own business knowledge, so the same request always prices the same way. You check it on a live preview of the one-page PDF, then download the PDF and copy the email text, copy a live link your customer can accept, or send it from aiKit.

Yes. On the quote, Copy customer link makes a private link to a page with your logo and the full quote (the same page as the PDF, reflowed on a phone). Your customer picks an option if there are several, types their name, ticks I accept, and presses Accept; no account and no payment. You get a notice right away, the quote shows as Accepted in your list with the accepted total, and the page shows who accepted and when. They can also ask a question or download the PDF. Send by email sends that link from aiKit for you, with the PDF attached, only when you press Send. The page shows the quote as it was when you last shared it, so later edits reach the customer only when you press Update & copy link.

Yes. In Business knowledge, Teach it takes typed or dictated notes, a CSV or Excel price list (you match each column to Product, Size, Model, List price, Your cost, a volume price and so on, with a preview, and it is read with no AI so the numbers stay exact), a public web page with your products, or a PDF or photo (a price sheet, a spec sheet, an old quote, a handwritten note). Each becomes a list of proposals: new products and sizes, price changes, volume prices, facts and private costs. You accept or skip each one, or Accept all, and nothing is used until you press Save changes.

In three steps, each rounded to the cent: your list price, then the volume price your website shows at that quantity (from the volume table in your business knowledge), then the extra percent you give for the project. The price table shows the website price, an Additional 8% off — this project row, and the total, so the numbers reconcile for the buyer. You can also price by percent off list or type a unit price. A price above your own website's price at that quantity is kept as you set it, with a warning only you see. Prices stay exact to the cent unless you turn on .88 endings for that business.

No. Landed costs, freight, the profit table, warnings and the list of automatic changes appear only in the Only you see this panel on your screen. The PDF, the customer's live page and the email are built from the customer-facing parts only, and before a quote is shared aiKit checks that copy for your never-say words and your costs and stops if it finds any, and standing rules remove vendor names and unconfirmed claims before it prints. Under a white-label brand, the quote carries nothing from your main brand: not its name, web address, phone, links, or a photo showing its logo.

Logo Kit turns any logo file, even a phone photo of a sign, shirt, or business card, into a clean vector logo. You get a set of ready versions (full color, black, white for dark backgrounds, and one color in each brand color, each labeled with what it's for, plus grayscale, reversed, and a small-size version under More versions), the exact brand colors in HEX, RGB, and CMYK with an approximate spot match, and a traffic-light read on how the logo will print by screen printing, embroidery, laser engraving, pad printing, cut vinyl, DTF transfers, and on screens. A match score shows how closely the clean vector matches your original, and a Before and after slider lets you compare. Everything downloads as one ZIP of SVG, PDF, and PNG files, plus a one-page brand sheet.

Logo Kit accepts PNG, JPG, HEIC, WebP, GIF, BMP, TIFF, PSD, SVG, PDF, AI, and EPS files, up to 60 MB each and up to 20 files at once, plus PowerPoint, Keynote, and Word files: pick the slide or the picture inside to use. Drag files onto the box or press Choose files. On a phone or other touch screen, a Take a photo button opens the camera, so you can photograph a logo on a sign, a shirt, or a business card. Files go straight from your browser to the logo engine, so large originals are sent whole rather than shrunk first. A file over 60 MB is stopped before it uploads, with a note to save a smaller copy or export a PNG or PDF. Each logo usually takes about a minute, with a step list and a clock showing progress. When a logo stops for a reason on our side, the message also says whether your file type is supported, so you know if the type is the problem. A blurry photo or a tiny image is the most common reason a logo stops; a sharper photo or the original file works best.

Yes. In Logo Kit, type a change the way you'd ask a designer, such as "make it one color navy," "remove the tagline," "use our green #2E7D32 instead," or "some text at the bottom left is missing" (missing art comes back from your own file, never redrawn), and press Make the change. Example buttons fill the box for common requests. Where a print method needs work, its card under Get it ready for how you'll use it says what in plain words, and its button makes the change for you, for example Make lines thicker and drop tiny bits for embroidery. You can ask for any change to the logo's own art, in your own words: remove a small piece, add a thin ring around it, recolor one part, move or resize a part, put back something missing. The example buttons are only shortcuts. Every change is checked against a before and after picture, and anything that wasn't done, or anything changed that you didn't ask for, is listed first under Not done yet, and that version isn't marked ready. Adding new art Logo Kit can't take from your file (a new icon, a photo, shadows) is listed there with the reason. If none of it can be made, nothing changes and nothing is counted. Later changes keep earlier ones: a part you removed stays removed. You can also type instructions before you add the file, in the Anything to change? box above the drop box (or use the microphone). The kit is made from your own file first, as version 1, and your instructions then make version 2, with a note listing what was done and anything not done. Every change makes a new version, and every preview on the page switches to it. Undo goes back one step, and Version history lists every version, newest first, with Restore on any earlier one. Undo and restore are always free.

A solid black, white, or gray circle or box behind colored art is usually a background, not the logo, so Logo Kit takes it out: the logo then works on any background, and every version (black, white, one color) is made from the art instead of turning into a plain disc. A card at the top of the logo says what was taken out, and Put the circle back brings it back exactly as it was in your file, as a new version. When the shape is a color, like a blue badge, it's kept and the card asks whether to take it out or keep it.

While a change is being made, your words show under the box with the version it will become and a clock, and the button says Making the change. When the new proof is in, the button is ready again, and the note says Version 2 (or whichever number), updated just now, with what you asked and What changed. Anything that wasn't done is listed first under Not done yet. Before and after shows a Version 2 · new badge and See version 1 to look back; Version history has every version.

Yes. Under Get it ready for how you'll use it, press the method (Screen printing, Embroidery, Laser engraving, Pad printing, Cut vinyl, DTF transfers, or Screens and web). It says in plain words what needs to change for that method, if anything, with a one-click fix, asks a few questions with buttons to tap (like garment color, size, placement or material), and then makes the real files in a few seconds, without tokens: films with registration marks for each screen-print or pad-print color, embroidery art with 1 mm minimum lines plus thread colors, a stitch estimate and a digitizer sheet, a one-tone laser file, vinyl cut paths with hard-to-weed pieces circled, a 300 dpi DTF file with a white underbase, or every web and app icon size. Embroidery stitch files (DST or PES) are still made by your digitizer from those files.

Every logo is checked part by part against your original file before it's shown, and anything the clean vector is missing is rebuilt from your file's own art. Words filled with a color blend (a gradient), such as one word in a ring of text, are kept with their blend. If a part was rebuilt, What the clean-up noticed says where; if a part still couldn't be rebuilt, the logo is marked Needs you and says where. For a logo made before this check, type what's missing under Say what you need, for example "the text at the bottom left disappeared": the missing art is put back from your original file as a new version you can undo, and if nothing is missing there, it says so.

Open Logo Kit. With no logo open, the page lists every logo you've made under Your logos, newest first, with a small picture, its status, its colors, and how many ready versions it has. Search by the logo's name or file name, filter by Ready, Needs you, Working, Stopped, or In a brand kit, pick a date range, or sort by name. Press a logo to open it with every version and its full history, ready to download or change again. Each logo also has its own address (/tools/logo-kit?job=…), so a bookmark opens it straight away. Brands you saved with Save to brand kit are on the Brand kits page, with their colors (press one to copy the HEX) and ready versions.

Logo Kit uses your account's tokens, the same tokens every aiKit AI tool uses; the tokens left show on the Logo Kit page. A logo uses a small, set amount once its clean-up finishes. A logo that stops partway, or whose file never finishes uploading, uses none, and the card says No use was counted for this file so you know. Each change in plain words uses a small amount. Fix it, making a print method's files, Undo, and Restore use none. So you can keep refining a logo until it's right, for example making a one-color version for screen printing and a white version for dark shirts, for a small amount each time.

Yes. The box at the top of Mockup Studio takes plain requests, typed or spoken with the microphone: "Put my logo on a black hoodie and a white mug", "Make the logo smaller and higher", "Show it on all my T-shirts", "Embroider it", or "Show every color". It turns the request into the studio's own actions (add products in a color, add a whole category of yours, size, position, location, decoration, product color, every color) and answers under the box with what it did and anything it did not do, with what to do instead. An AI request reader turns your words into those actions, so a request uses a small amount of tokens; if the reader doesn't answer, only simple wording is read and the answer says so.

Yes. Make a category under My products (for example T-shirts or Hats) and add your own blank product photos, such as your brand's blank T-shirt front and back. The studio finds the product in each photo and sets a centered print area for you; Adjust print area lets you move or resize that one box, with no drawing. Add a logo (upload it, or pick it from Logo Kit or your Graphics Library) and every product in the category shows it at once, following the fabric's folds and shading; Put my logo on all adds them all to the set to download or present. Categories can be for one client, and they are saved for your account, ready to rename, change, or delete.

Yes. Mark the mockups you like with the heart and press Presentation, or press Sales sheet for one mockup or the whole set. The builder makes the pages for you (a cover with the client's logo, an intro, a page per product, an overview, and next steps) and lets you change each page's layout (hero, grid, side by side, colorways, spec sheet, section), drag pages into any order, add notes, prices, and quantities, and set your logo, brand color, type, and paper. Download PDF prints exactly what you see, with no aiKit wording. Share with client makes a private link where the client, with no account, favorites, approves, and asks for changes on each product from any phone; their answers come back to you in the builder.

Yes. On a product made from your photo, press Edit the photo. Brush or circle the part you want changed. Erase the marked area is built in and free and works best on plain surfaces such as a lid. You can also describe a change ("make the grill red", "put it on a kitchen counter"), change only the marked area, or press Clean up product photo to remove existing brand marks and tidy the background; those use an image model, show their real cost (about 5 to 15 cents an edit). Only the marked area changes when an area is marked. Every edit is a new version with undo, redo, and a before and after compare.

Mockup Studio is open to every signed-in account. It puts your logo on real-looking products so a customer can see them before anything is made (shirts, hoodies, caps, beanies, totes, and aprons are studio pictures of real draped cloth, in every color): T-shirts, hoodies, caps, beanies, totes, aprons, mugs, tumblers, bottles, pint glasses, can coolers, jar labels, pens, notebooks, mouse pads, banners, yard signs, storefront windows, posters, banner stands, business cards, letterhead, envelopes, stickers, mailer boxes, cartons, shipping boxes, shopping bags, and pouches. The logo is placed exactly as it is, never redrawn, and it picks up the product's folds, curves, and light. You see every color at once, put one logo on many products in one go, and download PNGs, a ZIP (JPEG, or PNG when you tick High quality PNG), or a spec sheet PDF.

Yes. In Mockup Studio, Mockup from your own product photo takes 1 to 5 photos of any product, even a phone photo or a screenshot of it being worn (for a neck gaiter: flat, worn and folded), plus the client's art (PNG, JPG, SVG, PDF or a PDF-compatible Illustrator file). It finds the product in each photo, traces its edge, and puts the art on with the fabric's folds, shading and curve, one proof per photo, right away. Clean it up into a template (on by default, about 5¢) also makes a clean, flat, evenly lit blank of the product on a plain backdrop and shows the art on it first. A checklist shows each step while it works. Say where it goes in plain words, such as All over, Repeat it as a pattern, or Small, upper left. It then asks whether to add the product to My products so it is ready next time; the proof is made either way. Afterwards drag the art, use Size and Position, or type changes like make the logo bigger or show it on a person.

Yes. On the Design tab, Art covers switches between Once, All over and Repeat pattern. All over covers the whole print area edge to edge and stops at the product's traced outline, the way a sublimated neck gaiter or jersey looks; Repeat pattern repeats the art, and Size of each repeat sets how big each copy is. All-over print (sublimation) is one of the decoration methods. You can also ask in the request box: repeat the pattern, all over, or just once.

Yes. The quickest way is Mockup from your own product photo: drop 1 to 5 photos of the product and the art, and the product and its print area are found for you; then Save to My products keeps it for next time. My products categories also hold your blank product photos (for example T-shirts), with the print area set for you. A single photo can also be set up by hand: drag 4 corners to the imprint area, add curve for round items, and save it as one of your team's products. Import photos turns many product photos into products at once. Type any product that isn't on the shelf to see the closest products in the library and the other ways to make it; a picture made from the words is coming soon. Missing a product? Request it adds it to a wishlist for the aiKit team.

Mockup Studio shows full color print, screen print, pad print, embroidery (raised satin stitches), laser engraving (the tone depends on the material: bright on coated steel, dark on wood, frosted on glass), deboss, emboss, cut vinyl, and foil stamp (gold, silver, rose gold, copper, black, or white). It never drops a logo's colors without saying so: when a method like deboss shows no ink, a note names the colors that won't print and offers one-click switches to full color or foil. It checks what a shop would: whether the design fits the item's imprint area, whether its thinnest lines are thick enough for the method at that size (embroidery needs about 0.05 inch), how many colors the method takes and the setup each one adds, whether a shaded logo suits a spot-color method, and whether the logo file is sharp enough (150 dpi) at that size. Most checks come with a one-click fix. On dark products, spot-color methods can switch to a light version of the logo (the note says which color turns white), while full color print keeps every color.

Yes. Pick a stock color, any color by picker or hex code, or match a color by clicking a photo; on a product photo, Recolor changes the product's color while keeping its shadows. Set the finish (matte, gloss, metal, wood, fabric, glass, paper, kraft), the background (studio, gradient, none, or your own scene photo), and the light and shadow. For each location (front, back, sleeve, side, and more) set the method, the exact width in inches or centimeters, the position with presets and nudges, the rotation, and each ink color. The spec sheet shows all of it, and the PDF and ZIP spreadsheet carry it for quoting and production.

Mockups are saved in sets. Give a set a name and, if you like, the client and project it's for; after the first save, every change saves by itself. Saved sets lists your team's sets with a search by set, client, or project name, and every set has its own link that only your team can open. To show a client, mark your picks with the heart and press Presentation: you get a branded presentation you can rearrange, price, and share as a private link (the client can favorite, approve, and ask for changes without an account) or download as a PDF. Send to… also puts any mockup into your Graphics library, a new customer proof, or a project.

Photo Studio is aiKit's AI picture maker. You describe a picture in your own words, click looks from real sample pictures (style, lighting, camera shot, color mood, composition, frames and ready-made industry scenes), pick one of six models or Auto, and make 1 to 8 pictures at once. Every picture saves to your Graphics Library.

Five, named by what they are best at, each with a Standard or Best detail quality where it offers one: Everyday (great all-round pictures and real-looking photos), Quick & cheap (fast first ideas), Words in the picture (signs and posters that must spell right), Google look (photo-real scenes with natural light) and Illustration (clean designer art). Auto picks one for you and says why, and Compare models runs the same request on four of them side by side.

Yes. Put the words in quotes in your description (a sign that says "OPEN LATE"). Auto then uses the Words in the picture model, which spells words best. For cards, flyers and posters it also tells the model to add no other text, then reads the finished picture and makes it again (up to three times, trying the models that spell best, no extra charge) and keeps the cleanest try if it finds text you didn't ask for. If extra text is still there, the card says so. AI can still slip, so check every word before you print.

Press Change it under the picture, say what should change ("make the sky pink", "add a red umbrella") and press Make the change. The rest of the picture is kept the same, and the changed picture is saved as a new one.

Yes. Upscale offers 2× free on your own computer and 4× Print-sharp on our server on every plan. 6× and 8× (up to 8192 pixels on the long side) come with the paid plans.

Each one saves to your Graphics Library in a folder called Photo Studio, marked as made with AI, and shows in Photo Studio's History with the exact words, looks and model that made it. Send to opens a picture straight in Video Kit, Motion Maker, Magic Canvas, Pro Designer or Mockup Studio.

Yes. Pick Your product, add a photo of your product, and Photo Studio suggests 10 scenes for it (studio, lifestyle, premium ad and seasonal looks), or you describe your own. With Keep it exactly (the default), your real product is cut out of its photo and placed into the new scene pixel for pixel; only the scene, a soft shadow and a thin blend on the product's outer edge are new.

Not with Keep it exactly, the default for Your product. The picture model never draws your product: it paints the scene around it, and your product's own pixels from your photo go on top, so the weave, colors, label and printed words stay as they are (only resized to fit). Change it and More like this on such a picture make the scene again around the same real product. Choose Let AI restyle it if you want the AI to repaint the product so it blends in more; then small details like weave, labels and text may change. If your words ask to change the product itself, such as a new color or someone holding it, that picture uses Let AI restyle it and says so first.

Yes. Pick Restyle a photo, add the photo, and choose up to 3 styles to blend, one of 10 suggested looks, or describe the look in words. The photo's subject and layout stay; the look changes completely, from a film photo to watercolor, neon or ∞ cosmic light.

Each picture uses a small part of a token, from about 0.08 of a token (Quick & cheap) to 0.56 (Everyday at Best detail); Everyday at Standard is 0.2. The Make button shows the cost before you press it, and a picture that fails is not charged.

Open What's new in the aiKit sidebar (/home/whats-new). It has two parts. Just added lists new tools, new modules for your websites, and fixes, newest first, each with a short plain-words summary, a picture or the tool's icon, and a button that opens the tool. Coming next lists what the aiKit team is building next, each with a one-line reason and a rough timing like Next up or This month. Filter chips at the top show All, Tools, Modules or Fixes. A blue number next to What's new in the sidebar counts what arrived since you last looked, and opening the page clears it. Items you haven't read keep a New badge until you open them, press Mark as read, or press Mark all as read. Each item also has Copy link, which gives you an address that opens that exact item, so you can share it with your team.

Go to Settings in the aiKit sidebar, find Product updates in the Notifications card, and choose Email me. It starts on Off for every account, so you only get these emails if you ask for them. When the aiKit team sends out a new item from What's new, you get one email with the picture, a short summary, the details, and a button that opens the tool. Every one of these emails has a Stop product update emails link at the bottom. It opens a page with one button, and pressing it turns them off without signing in; just opening the link changes nothing. You can also switch back to Off in Settings at any time. Emails about your own work, such as proofs, quotes and password links, are separate and keep coming either way. Everything that is emailed is also on the What's new page.

Just added means it is in aiKit now and you can use it today: the card's button opens it. Coming next means the aiKit team is building it and it isn't ready yet. Coming next items show a rough timing, such as Next up, This month or Coming soon, instead of an exact date, because plans can shift; a date only appears when the team is sure of it. When a Coming next item is finished, it moves to Just added with the same link and its history kept, so you can see when it was planned and when it arrived, and it shows as New again so you notice. Tools are apps you use in your own workspace, like Logo Kit; modules are features you add to a website or app you build, like a booking calendar; fixes are improvements to tools you already have.

Open Settings in the aiKit sidebar and find Personality. Choose Off to turn off the friendly lines, Kit, celebrations and sounds all at once, or Light (the default) or Full for more. The Sounds switch turns only the sounds off or on, and the speaker button on Kit's bubble does the same. The choice is saved on that browser. Tools keep saying exactly what they are doing either way.

Kit is aiKit's buddy, a small ∞ loop with a face (you can give it another shape, color and accessory in Settings → Personality → Your buddy). It shows up for a few seconds in the bottom right corner: a wave on your first proof, video, quote or lesson, a cheer when you check off goal steps, and a friendly tip if the same small slip happens twice. It never appears on errors or payment screens, and you can close it with the X or the Escape key, or turn it off in Settings → Personality.

That's Kit reading along while you write an instruction. It peeks over the top right edge of a tool's larger text box, bobs a little and blinks when you pause, and on Full gives one happy squint when your instruction gets nicely detailed. It never talks or plays a sound while you type, clicks pass through it, and it leaves when you click out of the box. It never shows in password, card, email or phone fields, or on billing, tokens, sign-in or security pages. On Light it shows once you've typed a few words. To turn it off, choose Off in Settings → Personality.

On longer jobs in Photo Studio, Video Kit and the Presentation Builder, a Behind the scenes list shows the real steps the tool is working through, with a check on each step that's done and a small ∞ on the current one. Where the tool reports its stage the list follows it exactly; otherwise it moves at the usual pace and the last step waits for the real result. On Light it's one line you can open, on Full it's open, and on Off it's hidden.

That's a 2-second celebration clip for a big first: a small card near the top of the page plays one little scene (a rocket for a first site, a film reel for a first video, a page with a check for a first proof or deck, a spark for a first logo, a paper plane for a first email or quote) and says, for example, First video! It plays once per first on that browser, clicks go straight through it, and with reduced motion it's a still card. Choose Off in Settings → Personality to turn clips off.

Yes. Open Settings in the aiKit sidebar, find Personality, and use Your buddy. Pick a shape (Kit ∞, Pixel, Spark, Cloud or Triangle), a color (Blue, Violet, Coral or Mint) and one accessory (Glasses, Beret, Headphones, Bow tie, or None). The preview updates as you pick, and the look is saved on that browser and used everywhere Kit appears. Back to classic Kit restores the original.

Yes. Open Settings in the aiKit sidebar, find Personality, and pick a Style: Playful (the default), Words create worlds, Warm coach, Optimist, Future thinker, Poetic, Dry wit, Spunky or Calm & focused. Each shows a sample line. To make your own, type a few words describing a voice, like a cheerful pirate, and press Make my style; aiKit writes your lines with one small AI request (about half a cent) and saves them on that browser. Tap the small heart on lines you like and aiKit leans toward that kind of line over time. Choose Off under Personality for no lines at all.

Open My kits in the aiKit sidebar. At the top, an optional card asks What kind of work do you do? Press the closest choice (Print shop, Restaurant, Salon or spa, Contractor or trades, Retail store, Real estate, Nonprofit, Agency or designer, Health or wellness, or Other) or type a few words like “I run a dog grooming salon” and press Show my tools. aiKit then lists the tools that fit, each with one plain line about what it does for that kind of business and a Tool or Module tag, plus three things you can do this week, each with a button that opens the tool. For example, a print shop sees Printer’s Helper, Customer Proofs, and Quote Studio; a restaurant sees Booking, Reviews, and Email Studio. Only tools that work today are listed. The matching is a fixed list, not an AI call, so it is instant and free. Answering is optional, you can hide the card, and you can change your answer any time in Settings → Your work.

If the words you type don't match a kind of work aiKit has picks for, the card shows a set of tools that help almost any business, such as Brand Voice, Content Kit, Email Studio, and Reviews, and says so plainly. aiKit is still growing: more tools are being added, and the card links to Coming next on the What's new page so you can see what is being built. At the bottom of the card, the box What would you want a tool to do for you? lets you describe the tool you wish existed. It goes to the aiKit team, who read every answer when deciding what to build next.

A tool is an app you use yourself, like Printer’s Helper, Logo Kit or Email Studio. A kit is your own named set of tools for one part of your work, like Print shop or Marketing; make as many kits as you like, with any tools in each, and they sit in the sidebar under My kits. A module is a ready-made feature you add to a project (a website, online store, client portal or app), like a booking calendar or a quote form. Tools go in kits; modules go on projects.

In the Tool library, right under Home in the sidebar (it used to be called Explore Kits; on a phone it is Library in the bottom bar). It has two tabs: Tools for your kits and Modules for your sites, each with search, filters and previews. To add tools to one kit, open the kit and press Add tools: the Tool library opens with an Add to <kit> button on every ready tool.

On Home, press Make your first kit. Pick your kind of business and what you want help with, and aiKit suggests kits with their tools listed, such as Print shop, Design or Marketing. Tick the ones that fit and press Add. They appear under My kits in the sidebar, and you can rename them or change their tools any time. Or make an empty kit, name it, and fill it from the Tool library.

Drag it. In the sidebar (open a kit with the number beside its name) or on My kits, drag a tool onto another kit to move it there; hold Option (Alt on Windows) as you let go to copy it instead, so it stays in both. Drop it between two tools to put it in that exact spot, which is also how you reorder a kit. Without a mouse, right-click the tool, press its ⋯ button, press Shift+F10, or press and hold it on a phone, then choose Move to kit or Copy to kit. Every change shows a message with an Undo button for about seven seconds, and ⌘Z or Ctrl+Z works too. Taking a tool out of a kit never deletes anything made with it.

Right-click any tool in a kit (or press its ⋯ button, or press and hold it on a touch screen) to open it, open it in a new tab, move it up or down, move or copy it to another kit, start a new kit with it, pin it to the dock, read about it, copy its link, or take it out of the kit. For Graphics Library, Logo Kit, and Mockup Studio there is also Send my latest work to, which sends your newest picture, logo, or mockup to Motion Maker or to a blog post in Content Kit. Right-click a kit to open, rename, recolor, add a tool to, copy the link of, or delete it (aiKit asks first, and only the grouping goes).

Yes. In the Graphics Library, select the photos and clips you want (up to 40) and choose Send to → Send to Motion Maker in the bar at the bottom, or pick Send to Motion Maker from one graphic's ⋯ menu. Motion Maker opens with them already on its timeline, in the order you selected them; add a template, words, and music, then make an MP4, WebM, or GIF. For a blog post instead, choose Use in a blog post on one picture: Content Kit opens with the picture ready, and Use as the main photo places it on the post you open.

Anything you need to write, with Write anything: an article, essay, letter, speech, script, story, email, or your own kind, with an optional 2 to 4 quick questions first. Plus ad copy and full ad campaigns (Google Search, Performance Max, Facebook and Instagram, Stories and Reels, TikTok, LinkedIn, Microsoft Advertising, and placements you type yourself), with a full campaign adding a matching launch email, social posts, and landing page copy, sales letters (a long sales page, a one-page letter, a sales email, or a 3 to 7 email sequence), and press releases for nine kinds of news with a media kit. It is at /tools/writing and as a tab in Content Kit, which writes blog posts and product descriptions; the Blog post card on the Writing Pack home opens Content Kit's New post. Every draft follows your Brand Voice and opens in an editor with AI built in.

Yes. Write anything, the first card in the Writing Pack (/tools/writing), writes any kind of piece: Article, Essay, Letter, Speech, Script, Story, Email, or your own kind under Other. Describe it in one box (type or dictate), pick the length and who it's for, keep your brand voice or turn it off, and choose Standard or Best writing quality. Keep it positive is on by default. Before writing it asks 2 to 4 quick tap-to-answer questions written for your request, or press Skip and write. For non-fiction it never invents facts, quotes, or statistics, and it lists every statement you should confirm under Checks. For example, a volunteer coordinator could type "a five-minute thank-you speech for our spring cleanup crew" and get a speech written for the ear, ready to edit.

Start with real news: something that matters to people outside your company, like a launch, a milestone, local jobs, new data, an event, or a partnership. Put the news in the headline and the first two sentences, add one real quote from a named person, and keep it to about 400 to 600 words. Then pick 5 to 20 reporters who cover your topic (local and trade press first) and send each a short personal email, 2 to 4 lines on why their readers care, with the release pasted below and no attachments. Follow up once after 3 to 5 days. The Writing Pack's press release screen has this as a guide, How to get your release covered, with a checklist to tick off before you send.

It depends on what you want. A wire service is paid; it puts your release on many news sites at once, which can help people find it in search. But most of those pickups are automatic reposts, not stories a reporter chose to write, so they carry less weight than one real article. Use a wire for wide reach, and still pitch the few reporters who cover your topic one-to-one. aiKit writes the release and the pitch email; it doesn't send or distribute releases for you.

It's better not to. Bulk emails to people you don't know mostly get ignored, and unsolicited mass email can break anti-spam rules such as CAN-SPAM in the US and GDPR in Europe. Send one-to-one, to reporters whose recent stories fit your news, with a short note on why it suits their readers. The Writing Pack's pitch email (under Media kit on a press release) is written for exactly that.

Yes. In the Writing Pack, pick Ad copy and campaigns, then A full campaign. One run writes 2 to 6 ad groups with their own ads, keywords, and A/B angles, a campaign plan, and the pieces that go with them: a launch email (subject lines, preview text, the email, and button text), 3 to 5 social posts for the platforms you picked, and landing page copy (headline, sections, button text, and buyer questions). Everything shares one message and the same offer, in your brand voice, and nothing is invented: prices and deadlines appear only if you gave them, and anything to confirm is listed before you use it. The Write it bar shows about how many tokens it uses before it starts.

Yes. Each platform's limits (for example 30 characters for a Google headline and 90 for a description) are checked in code after the AI writes, not just asked for. A line that comes back too long is rewritten once; anything still over is marked red with its count. Every line shows a live character count as you edit, and Google ads get pinning and an Ad strength check. Download a Google Ads Editor CSV (also for Microsoft Advertising), a keywords CSV, or every line in one CSV.

No. In the Writing Pack's editor, every AI change (from the selection menu, the / menu, Rewrite, Feedback fixes, Variations, or the chat beside the draft) shows as a suggestion: the old words struck through and the new ones highlighted. You accept or reject each one, or all at once. Accepted changes are saved as versions, and you can bring back any earlier version.

It is built not to. It uses only the facts in your answers, your business details, and the references you attach; anything missing is left as a highlighted [placeholder] for you to fill in. Changes you ask for in the chat or in your own words under Rewrite never add new [placeholders]; a part that would need a missing fact is listed first as Not done yet instead. Prices, discounts, guarantees, and deadlines appear only if you gave them. Sales letters quote only real customer words you paste or reviews you published in aiKit's Reviews tool, and it never writes testimonials. Read every draft before you use it: the AI can still get things wrong.

A rule set the writers follow and a checker that underlines anything that breaks it as you type. The aiKit Positive preset avoids words like "can't", "try", and "unfortunately", says what is possible, turns problems into the next step, and stays confident without being cheesy. You can copy it and make your own rules (words to avoid with what to say instead, things to always do, before-and-after examples) and share a rule set with a website's team. Fix them with AI rewrites only the sentences that break the rules.

Yes. Under References in a draft, add PDFs, Word files, text, CSV, pictures, a web page address, or pasted notes (up to 12 per draft). The writer takes its facts from them, you can see what it read from each one, and you can switch any of them off. Draft this for me can also fill a form box from them.

Add up to three people to quote with their titles and what they'd want to say. The Writing Pack drafts a quote for each, marked as needing approval, and lists them in the Quotes panel with a box to tick once that person approves their words. A release stays a draft until every quote is approved. Your boilerplate, media contact, and people are remembered for the next release.

It uses your account's tokens, the same tokens as aiKit's other AI tools; there is no separate monthly count. Bigger runs, such as a whole campaign, a long sales page, an email sequence, or several versions at once, show about how many tokens they will use, and how many you have left this month, in the Write it bar before you press it.

Yes. In a draft, open Feedback in the AI panel and press Review my draft. You get a readiness score out of 10, what already works, and three to seven specific fixes, most important first, each with the words to change, the new words, and why it matters to your reader. Apply puts a fix into the draft as a suggestion you accept or reject, and Apply all does every open fix at once.

Yes. Variations in the AI panel writes three clearly different takes of the whole draft or of the text you selected, and shows them side by side next to the current text. Use one whole, or pick the paragraphs you like from any of them and press Combine the parts I picked to join them into one. Sales letters written with several versions open the same side-by-side view.

Headings, lists, checklists, quotes, tables, dividers, pictures from your Graphics Library, text color and highlight, alignment, links (paste a web address onto selected words to link them, and a link card to open, edit, or remove), find and replace with match case and whole words, comments pinned to words, Markdown shortcuts and Markdown paste, clean paste from Word and Google Docs, word count, reading time and reading level, focus mode, full screen, a keyboard shortcut sheet, and copy as formatted text, plain text, email-ready HTML, HTML code, or Markdown.

It is an aiKit tool at aikit.ai/tools/transcribe that turns what was said into notes. Talk into your microphone, upload a video or audio file, paste a YouTube or web link, or paste text. You get a transcript with times and speakers, a short, medium or detailed summary, key points, decisions, to-dos, and reports (meeting minutes, client brief, blog post, follow-up email, or anything you ask for). You need to be signed in. For example, the owner of a made-up print shop could upload a recorded customer call and send the follow-up email the same afternoon.

No audio is stored. Your browser cuts the sound into short pieces, each piece is transcribed and dropped, and only the text is kept. The transcript and summary are kept until you delete them, or for 90 days on a free account. You can delete a recording at any time from its page, and that also stops its share link.

Yes, with limits. For a web page it reads the visible text and summarizes it (it does not copy the page, and it cannot read pages that need a login). For YouTube it tries the video's public captions; aiKit never downloads the video or its sound. YouTube often refuses our servers, so if it says it can't read the video, upload the video or audio file instead. It is not counted when that happens. Only use content you have the right to use.

Recordings (MP4, MOV, MP3, M4A, WAV, WebM) are listened to in your browser. Documents are read for their words: PDF, Word, PowerPoint (including speaker notes), Excel, text, HTML, RTF, and pictures of text such as a chat screenshot. Transcripts exported from Zoom, Teams, Google Meet, Otter, Fireflies, Rev and YouTube work too (.vtt, .srt, .txt, .docx), and subtitle files keep their times. Documents can be up to 4 MB and 30,000 words, and old .doc, .ppt and .xls files need to be saved as .docx, .pptx or .xlsx first. Nothing you upload is stored except the text you get back. If you have no file handy, the start screen has a sample meeting and a sample call you can try.

Yes. Open the Ask tab on a finished recording and type a question in your own words, for example what price was agreed or who has to do what by Friday. The answer comes only from what was said and shows the times of the lines it used; click a time to jump to that spot. If the recording doesn't say, the answer is marked Not in this recording instead of guessing. Up to 40 questions per recording are included and don't use another recording.

Yes. Turn on Edit text and click any line to fix it, or use Find and replace to correct a misheard name everywhere at once. Rewrite as can make a clean transcript with the ums and repeats removed, or translate the whole transcript into another language. The summary and to-dos are not rewritten after you edit, and a note tells you so. A clean transcript or translation handles up to 5,000 words at a time.

It estimates speakers from the words (turns, questions and answers, names said aloud), not from the voices, and says so on the Transcript tab. Type a name into any speaker box to rename it everywhere. If two people have similar lines it can mix them up, so check anything important.

Each recording uses your account's tokens, and the tokens left are shown on the start screen. On a free account a recording can be up to 30 minutes. You can make up to 10 reports from each recording. Accounts with an Unlimited or Comp plan can record up to 3 hours at a time.

Only when they know it is being recorded or you have their OK; some places require everyone's consent. The tool asks you to confirm this before it starts. aiKit does not provide legal advice, and the transcript is not a certified record for legal or medical use.

Goal Kit turns any goal into a dated plan that works backwards from your finish line, then helps you do each step. Open aikit.ai/tools/goals, say the goal in a sentence (typed or spoken), pick its kind and when you want to reach it, and optionally your own milestones, hours a week, budget and starting point. You get phases, milestones on real dates, and weekly steps. Steps that an aiKit tool can do have a button that opens the tool, such as Email Studio for a welcome email or Reviews for review requests, and Guide me walks you through any step for your situation. Your first goal is free with no account.

Yes, that's what it's built for. Pick Business, describe what the business does and the tools you use today, and say the goal, for example: set up marketing automation with welcome emails, review requests and a monthly newsletter. The plan's steps are concrete actions sized to your hours, and the ones aiKit can do open the right tool. On any step, Guide me gives numbered actions for your setup, what done looks like, common mistakes, and a check question, and you can ask follow-ups in plain words ("my emails are in a Google Sheet, how do I get them in?") until the step is done.

Every live aiKit tool and website module can be matched to a step: Email Studio, Reviews, Brand Voice, Content Kit, Writing Pack, Magic Canvas, Pro Designer, Logo Kit, Mockup Studio, Video Kit, Motion Maker, Quote Studio, the Hub, websites and their modules (like a review wall or online booking), and the rest. Each step shows the ones recommended for it, best first, with the first as an Open button. Find a tool searches all of them, Add to step adds one, and × removes one. New aiKit tools are included the day they ship.

Personal, Professional, Business, Learning, Health, Creative and Other, all with the same depth of plan. The kind changes the plan's stance and the coach's voice: business goals get direct, numbers-forward coaching; learning goals build from the basics to advanced; personal and health goals get a gentler voice that never treats a missed day as failure. Health goals show a note that Goal Kit is a planning companion, not medical advice.

Type or say the change in Change the plan in your words, for example "I can only work on Sundays" or "drop the ads part and add a step to ask my best customers for reviews", and press Change it. The whole plan is rewritten at once. Finished steps never change. If part of the request couldn't be done, it says Not done yet with the reason first. You can also add a step to any milestone, check steps and milestones off, and edit notes on each step. Plan changes need a free account and use a little of your tokens.

The progress bar has a pace line showing where you'd be on schedule. When a step is late or you're behind pace, the plan offers a one-click re-plan: Move everything later shifts every open step so the oldest late one lands tomorrow and shows the new finish date, or Keep my finish date fits the open steps between tomorrow and your date. The weekly check-in (Did it, Partly, Blocked) offers the same when the week didn't go to plan. Re-planning uses no tokens.

The step itself says Tool needed, with what the tool would do, Create it with aiKit and Ask aiKit to build it, and Find a tool searches every aiKit tool and website module in case one fits. The plan also lists each missing tool under Tools this plan could use with three choices: Copy build prompt (a detailed prompt for any AI app builder that first asks you 4 to 6 questions so the tool fits you), Request it from aiKit (your request and the prompt go to aiKit's team), or Build it as an aiKit project (opens the project planner with the prompt filled in).

Yes. Send to Hub turns every open milestone and step into dated cards on an aiKit Hub board: a new board in a new Hub project named after the goal (the default, one list per phase), a new board in a project you already have, or a board you already have. Step cards link to their tool and back to Guide me.

With a free account, yes: a bell notice the day before each milestone, on the day, and when it's late, plus a Monday notice with the week's steps and a one-click check-in. Also email me sends them by email too. Turn them off per goal in Reminders, or change when they come in Settings → Notifications. Pausing a goal stops its reminders.

No. It plans and guides; it isn't professional advice. For a health or personal goal it helps you build a practice and notice real progress; for anything serious, talk to a doctor, counselor, or someone you trust, and if you're ever in crisis contact local emergency services or a crisis line right away.

Sign in with the email you were invited with (password, email code or Google): you join on your own. Your team space is always in the left sidebar under Home (on a phone, in the menu), and Home shows Open your team space until you've read the brief. The timer is in the top bar of every page, next to Report a problem: Start timer to begin, Stop to end it, with the running time shown while it counts. It's the same timer as the one in your space.

Yes. When a fix is live and you press Still wrong, What is still wrong? takes pictures (PNG, JPEG, WebP, GIF, iPhone HEIC), screen recordings (MP4, MOV, WebM up to 250 MB) and PDFs, up to 10, by picking, dragging or pasting; they go to the fixer with your words and show under Your follow-ups on the report. A Team program thread message takes the same files with Attach, and only you and your Lead can open them.

A Hub project for a group of freelancers or testers, made from the Team program template. Each person accepts one brief, then works in their own space with their instructions, their cards (one per tool, each with a checklist), a private thread with the Lead and a timer. The Lead sees everyone's work, the hours (with a CSV export for pay), the ideas, a day-by-day timeline and a private scorecard with a weekly A to D grade.

The brief, their own space (instructions, cards, thread, time) and the shared Already reported list, which shows titles and status only, never who sent a report. They never see other members' spaces, hours, threads, the timeline or the scorecard, and being on a program doesn't add them to the rest of the Lead's Hub.

Yes, and the brief says so before anything starts: members press I've read this to accept it. While they're signed in on aikit.ai, the work log credits the pages and tools they work in with active time, what they make, report and share, their checklist ticks and their time entries, so nobody fills in timesheets. It only covers aikit.ai and only people on a program. Only the Lead sees the timeline and scorecard built from it.

When their logged hours reach their milestone. The Lead can set milestone hours per person (for example 10, 12 or 20); there are no fixed dates. The member sees X of Y hours used in their space, and once it's reached their open cards show Due now, on their board and on the Lead's.

The Lead adds each person with the email of their aiKit account, then presses Send invite email for one person or Send to everyone not joined yet. The email has a Join the program button and a line about the brief; nothing is sent until the Lead presses Send. The Lead can also copy the link and send it another way, and anyone who signs in to aiKit with the invited email (password, email code or Google) joins on their own.

By itself. A member presses Report a problem on the page where it happened; the report links to their card for that tool or page, the card moves to Waiting on fixes, and the card shows the report with its live status. When a fix goes live the card shows Live, please check, and the member is asked to re-test.

Per week: quality first (valid reports, hard-to-find reports scored 1 to 5, reports that led to a fix, clear reports, ideas built), then active hours and how much of their checklist they covered, then follow-through (re-tests answered, the Friday summary, the brief accepted). The grade comes with a reason line, and the Lead can change it, set a verdict or difficulty on any report, and add a private note.

Press Share an idea, next to Report a problem at the top of every page when signed in, or at the bottom of the public website. Write the idea, add a picture if you like, and send it. Your ideas lists what you sent and whether it's New, Planned, Built or Not now, and you hear back when one is built.

It is an aiKit tool at aikit.ai/tools/lessons that turns any subject into a set of lessons. You say what to learn and who it's for (a school class, college, homeschool, a skill, business training, yourself, or anyone else), pick how many lessons and which add-ons you want, check the outline, and the full lessons are written: goals, a hook, real teaching with examples, an activity, check-yourself questions, a recap and key terms. You can change anything in plain words, share a learner link, or download Word, PDF or Google Docs.

Quizzes for every lesson, a final test, answer keys, worksheets, flashcards, homework, discussion prompts with exit tickets, timed teacher lesson plans, a final project, a rubric, a glossary, a letter for parents or managers, a certificate of completion, video scripts, a learning song or chant per lesson, a ready-to-play class game, and slides made in the Presentation Builder. Each add-on has ⚙ options: how many, how hard, which kinds of questions, and your own instructions. Pick Other and type anything else, such as a crossword of the key terms or a role-play script; any request is followed, and anything it can't do is listed under Not done yet.

Yes. For school, college and homeschool lessons you can tap Common Core, NGSS, C3, your state's standards, AP, IB, the UK National Curriculum, the Australian Curriculum, CEFR, ISTE or CASEL, and type any other standards or codes. The plan lists the codes the lessons line up with, marked check against your official list. They are a strong starting point, not an official approval.

Yes. Pick Business training and say what learners must reach and what must be covered (for example your three-point inspection, safety basics, or who to call). Anything only you know, like your company's own policy or prices, is left as a [placeholder] to fill in instead of being invented. Add a quiz, a manager summary and a certificate of completion if you want them.

Yes. Pick any language for the lessons, and under Also make it in add up to four more: every lesson and add-on gets a full copy in each, with a switch in the editor and on the learner link. Under More options pick a reading level from Very simple to Expert, plus learner needs such as English learners, extra support for IEP or 504 plans, dyslexia-friendly, advanced learners or young children. On any written lesson you can also make an Easier, Harder or Extra-support version, each kept as its own add-on, so one class can have all three.

Yes. Open Build from my material on the setup screen and add a PDF, Word file, PowerPoint, text file or a photo of textbook pages (up to 4 MB), a web page link, or notes you paste or dictate. The lessons follow your material's order and keep its terms and definitions. Files are read for their words and not stored.

Yes, with the learner link. Press Share and Turn on the learner link, then send the link. Learners don't need an account: they read the lessons, answer the questions and see right away whether they were right and why, flip flashcards, and tick lessons as finished. Teacher notes, lesson plans, the final test and letters stay private. Scores are kept only on the learner's own device for now; they are not sent back to you.

Yes. Make the slides (in Keep learning, on any lesson, or by ticking Slides) builds a Presentation Builder deck with goals, teaching slides, a quiz slide after each lesson and a recap. From there you can present, share a student view, and download PowerPoint, which opens in Google Slides. Once the slides exist, Make a video in Video Kit starts a captioned video from them.

Every lesson set comes with Learn next topics to study afterward and Related lesson sets on nearby topics, each with a one-line reason. Press one to plan it with the same settings. Your own saved sets on similar topics are listed too.

Yes. Every lesson gets real photos automatically (free stock photos, checked so each shows the actual thing), and under any picture you can find another photo, make an AI illustration or diagram (about 5¢ of AI credits), upload your own, or remove it. Pictures carry into Present mode, the learner link, PDF, Word, Google Docs and the slides.

Yes. ▶ Present shows the lesson full screen: a title screen with its picture, the goals, one screen per section, each check question on its own screen, and the recap. Arrow keys move, and Read aloud reads each screen with your device's own voice. Learners have Present on the learner link too.

Yes. Pick up to three kinds of lesson on the setup screen: Visual, Story, Game & challenge, Music & song, Hands-on, Discussion & debate, Real-world case, Micro-lessons or Project-based, plus a teaching template such as 5E, I do / We do / You do, Madeline Hunter, Understanding by Design, Gagné's 9 events or ADDIE. Add-ons include a learning song or chant per lesson and a ready-to-play class game, and any written lesson can be turned into another kind with one click.

Yes. On the setup screen, Match lessons you've made takes lessons you wrote before (PDF, Word, PowerPoint, text, a link or pasted text). The new lessons copy their layout, section names, tone and level of detail, but not their topic.

Very. Tap any ages from 3–5 up to seniors, pick a level that fits who it's for (grade, course level, experience on the job, or starting point), and type the exact age or level in your own words, for example 7 and 8 year olds reading at a 1st grade level.

It uses the tokens on your aiKit plan. The outline uses very little; each lesson and add-on uses a few tokens, and the screen shows about how many before you press Write everything. Downloads, the learner link and hand edits use none.

It is an aiKit tool at aikit.ai/tools/record-and-send for quick video messages. Record your screen, your camera or both in the browser, press Stop, and paste the link. Anyone with the link can watch without an account. There is nothing to install.

On the free plan, up to 10 minutes per video and 25 videos, kept for good. Paid aiKit plans record up to 2 hours per video. Free recordings have their own room and don't use your Hub storage.

The recording isn't lost. The video is sent to the cloud while you record, and every second is also kept on your computer until the cloud confirms the whole file. If something stops it, open the Screen Recorder again and press Finish sending, or download the file from your computer.

Phone and tablet browsers only let websites use the camera, so on a phone you can record yourself with Camera only. To record a screen, open the Screen Recorder on a computer in Chrome, Edge or Safari.

Yes. In Link settings you can choose Anyone with the link or Only me and my team, add a password, set a date when the link stops working, turn downloads on or off, or make a brand-new link so the old one stops working.

Yes, any time, as an MP4 file in Chrome, Edge and Safari (WebM in Firefox). You choose whether people watching your link can download it too.

Yes. The Screen Recorder has folders (and folders inside folders) and lets you file any video under one of your aiKit clients. The left menu shows All videos, Recent, your folders, your clients and Trash. Select several videos to move them or set their client at once. Deleting a folder never deletes its videos.

Press Share on the video. Copy the link; email it from aiKit (it sends the video's picture and a Watch button from your name, and replies come to you) or open your own email app with the link filled in; post it to LinkedIn, Facebook, X or WhatsApp, or send it by text; or copy an embed code for a website. Viewers don't need an account.

Yes. Like Loom it records your screen and camera and gives you a link with an AI title, summary, chapters, to-dos and captions. Differences today: the free plan records up to 10 minutes per video instead of 5, nothing needs installing, a copy is kept on your computer until the upload is confirmed so a recording can't be lost, and the notes can be made again with any request in your own words. Viewers can also react and comment at any moment of the video, with no account, and you can reply and mark each one done. They can also reply with a video of their own, no account needed. Viewer details are coming in a later round.

Yes. On the video's page, Turn it into… makes a how-to guide (numbered steps, each with a picture from the video), an email draft with your video link, or slides in the Presentation Builder. Everything comes only from what you said in the video, and each uses a few of your tokens. The guide can be copied as text or printed and saved as a PDF.

Yes. Under the video on your link, Ask this video lets anyone who can watch type a question and get an answer taken only from what you said, with buttons that jump to the moments behind it. If the video doesn't cover it, the answer says so. Answers use a little of your tokens (up to 60 questions a video a day), you can switch it off per video, and you can read every question viewers asked.

Yes. On the video's page, Captions in other languages translates the captions into any of 19 languages, once per language, using a few of your tokens. Viewers choose the language in the Captions menu under the video, or with the player's CC button, and each language's captions can be downloaded as a .vtt file. Spoken dubbing isn't available.

Yes. In the Quotes Send window and the proof Send window, Add a video under the note lists your Screen Recorder videos. Pick one and its link goes into the note, and the email aiKit sends shows the video's picture with a Watch the video link that opens it. You can also record a new one from the same button. In Email Studio, a Video block picks one of your recordings for its cover and link, and in the Hub, Add a video under a message or comment shows the video as a picture people press to watch.

Yes. Upload a video in the Screen Recorder takes an MP4, MOV or WebM file. It gets its own link, an AI summary, chapters, to-dos and captions, and works with folders, clients, sharing, comments and video replies like any recording. The free plan takes videos up to 10 minutes; paid plans up to 2 hours.

Yes. Start from a template (quote walkthrough, weekly update, report a problem, sales intro, thank you or how-to) to fill in a title and a script outline, or have the AI write a script from a few words. While you record, the teleprompter scrolls your script on the recording page at the speed and size you choose. It's never part of the video.

Yes. While you record, the Screen Recorder's bar has a pen, a highlighter that fades, arrows, a spotlight and click ripples, plus emoji bursts and a name banner. Choose a tool and draw on the live picture of your recording; everything is painted into the video, so viewers see it. You can also pick a white, blue or rainbow ring for your camera bubble. Background blur isn't available yet.

Yes. On any video's page, Your branding lets you upload your logo and set your business name, an about line, your website and a button color. They show at the top of the watch page for every video you share, and the button color is used for the buttons on the page. Videos made on the free plan also keep a small Made with aiKit line at the bottom.

Yes. On the video's page, Button under the video lets you write your own message and button text, then choose what the button does: open any page (a booking page, a payment link, a quote) or open a short form you build with up to 8 questions. Viewers see it right under the video on your link, with no account needed, and form answers come to you as notifications and are listed on the video page.

Yes. Under the video on your link, Reply with a video lets anyone who can watch record an answer with their camera (or their screen and camera on a computer), up to 5 minutes, with no account. Replies show under your video as one thread, you get a notification for each one, and you can answer with a video too. Replies don't count toward the free plan's 25 videos.

Yes. Under the video on your link, anyone who can watch types their name and leaves a reaction (like 👍 or 🎉) or a comment at the second that's playing, with no account. Each one shows as a dot along the video that jumps to that moment. You can reply, mark a thread done or delete it, and you're notified of each new comment on the bell and by email (change it in Settings → Notifications).

Yes. When you press Stop, what was said is written down and the AI makes a title, a summary, key points, chapters, captions and a What to do next list, shown beside the video on your link. You can make the notes again with any request (shorter, in Spanish, list the prices). Only the sound is sent to be written down, and nothing is invented: a video with no speech gets no notes.

Yes. Clean it up on the video page finds the long pauses and the ums and uhs, and lets you trim the start and end. Tick what to remove and press Save: the link plays the cleaned-up version right away. The download stays the full original recording.

Open Tools → Live Chat → Sites → Add a site, type your site's name and address, and copy the one line of code it gives you into your site, just before the closing </body> tag or in your site builder's custom code box. Check install on the Install tab tells you when the chat has loaded. The chat only opens on the addresses you saved for that site, so copying the line onto another website doesn't work. For example, a made-up bakery like Maple Street Bakery would paste the line once and see the chat button on every page.

Yes. Every chat from every site on your account lands in one inbox, each labeled with its site, with Needs attention, All and Resolved views, search, notes, saved replies and Assign to me. Each site still has its own chat name, greeting, colors, hours and buttons, and a new site can start as a copy of one you already have. Pro includes 1 site, Team 3, Business 5 and Agency 10.

Visitors are told up front that nobody is available right now and see your Request a quote, Request an estimate and Send a message buttons, so they're never left waiting. If you turn on AI answers when no one is online, the assistant replies from your own website and documents, labeled Automated, and offers those buttons or a person when it isn't sure. Messages they leave land in your inbox and alert you.

It's built not to. It answers only from what you gave it (your website, links, documents and your own Q&A), and when the answer isn't there it says so and hands off. Your own answers outrank your website text, topics you mark as "team always answers" never get an AI reply, and published quantity prices are calculated in code, not by the AI. Answers that mention prices, promises or conflicting facts appear in To review, and any answer can be fixed from the inbox. It can still be wrong, so read what it says in your inbox.

It uses your plan's AI allowance. On the Standard setting a reply has cost well under a cent in our tests (about half a cent); Smarter costs about twice as much. The usage meter shows the real cost of each reply and of translation. Limits keep surprises away: 20 assistant answers per chat per hour and 400 per site per day.

Yes, when your team turns it on. The chat notices the visitor's language for free and shows Turn on translation with about what it costs per message (a few thousandths of a cent in our tests). Once on, you read and reply in your language, the visitor reads your replies and the chat window in theirs, and either side can see the original. The same words are never translated twice, and translation has its own line on the usage meter. Each site can ask each time, always translate, or never translate.

Yes. Set the site to Chat only (Sites → Settings → What visitors see). Visitors get only the conversation: name, email and messages with your team. The Quote, Estimate and Send a message buttons are hidden and the assistant never answers visitors on its own; when nobody's free, they leave a message and you reply by email. Your inbox tools still work, and switching back to Full chat restores your buttons.

Open Live Chat → Sites → Add a site. Type the new site's name and address, and under Start from pick A copy of an existing site's settings (colors, hours, buttons, alerts and helper come along) or Start fresh. Each site gets its own install line, and every site's chats land in the same inbox. Pro includes 1 site, Team 3, Business 5 and Agency 10; the Sites list shows how many you're using.

Yes. Quick quote in an open chat lets you type a few lines (item, how many, price each) and send it; the visitor gets a button to view and accept it. It's a normal Quote Studio quote, so you can open it there for the full editor, reminders and PDF. Save as contact adds the visitor to your Clients.

Connect your code links an aiKit project to a Git repository you already have, such as a Laravel or JavaScript app on GitHub, and to where it runs: your own server or aiKit hosting. You ask for a change in plain words on the project's Hosting tab. aiKit's AI edits a copy of the code, runs the project's checks (for Laravel: PHP syntax, Blade views, the front-end build, and a test run of key pages), and shows you the diff and a preview. Nothing deploys until someone on your team presses Approve and deploy. Each approved change is saved to your repository as a commit naming who asked and who approved, then deployed and checked. Every deploy is a numbered release, and Roll back puts an earlier one live again with one click.

No. With Your own server, the site stays exactly where it runs today and keeps deploying with its own deploy script. aiKit gets a separate, restricted login on the server. That login has no password and no shell; its key is locked to a small gate script that accepts only two commands: status (which version runs) and deploy of one exact commit. The deploy checks that your repository's branch points at that commit, then runs your existing deploy command unchanged. Setup is eight copy-and-paste steps, filled in for your server, that take about 10 minutes once. The page also gives the commands to test that the login reaches the site folder and nothing else.

No. aiKit never reads, copies or changes .env files, private keys or auth.json, and nobody is able to switch that rule off. On your server, aiKit's login can run only status and deploy of one commit, and the setup steps add folder permissions so the login is refused at the other sites in the same home folder and at the site's .env. The checks run on aiKit's engine with a throwaway test database, never your live database, and the test run gets throwaway settings instead of your .env. Your GitHub token or deploy key, and the server login's key, are stored encrypted and never shown again; the page shows only fingerprints.

Protected files are files aiKit's AI leaves alone. By default that means database migrations that already ran on the live site, new migrations, the deploy script, and the dependency files; the owner adds any file or folder with a reason, such as payment logic or data written by a nightly job. If a request truly needs a protected file, the owner ticks Allow protected files for this request. The finished change then shows a Protected badge on each such file, and only the owner can approve it, after ticking a second confirmation. A builder never gets protected access. Every change is logged with who asked and who approved.

Open the project's Hosting tab and find Releases. aiKit keeps the last 5 releases, each with its commit, who made it, its status and how many of your key pages answered after it went out. Press Roll back to this on an earlier release and confirm. aiKit makes a new commit whose files are exactly that release's, pushes it to your branch, deploys it the normal way, and checks the pages again. Because it is a new commit, history is never rewritten, and the rollback itself can be undone the same way. If a deploy leaves a page failing, the release is marked Live, pages failing, so you see it right away.

Any Git repository you can reach with a GitHub token (https:// address) or a deploy key (git@ address), on any branch. Laravel projects get the full check set: PHP syntax, Blade views compiling, the front-end build, and a test run with a throwaway SQLite database where your listed pages must answer. JavaScript projects get a syntax check of changed files and their build. Code can run on your own server over SSH (any server where you can add a login and a sudo rule, including Laravel Forge servers) or on aiKit hosting. A public repository can be connected read only, which shows the code but leaves approved changes with nowhere to be saved.

Press Report a problem. Signed in, it sits at the top of every page next to the light/dark switch, with a flag (on screens under 1100 pixels wide, the flag alone; on a phone, in the menu); on the public website it's at the bottom of every page after Something not working?; on the Connect page it's inside the Stuck? Ask here panel. A short form opens. Under What happened?, say what you were doing, what you expected, and what happened instead, for example "I pressed Save on my shop profile and nothing happened." You can dictate with the Speak button, and pick how bad it is (Blocker, High, Medium or Low) if you like. Add pictures, a screen recording or a PDF if it helps: pick several, drag them in, or paste screenshots, up to 10 files per report. You can also paste a video link from Loom, Google Drive or YouTube. Press Send report and you'll see your report's number, like Report #12. The aiKit team reads every report.

Exactly what the form shows under Sent with your report: the address of the page you were on, your browser, your account (or Not signed in), and the time, plus whatever you typed, the files you attached, and your video link if you gave one. Nothing else from your screen, files, or projects is sent. If you aren't signed in, an email field appears, and filling it in is optional; it's only used to tell you when the problem is fixed. Attached files are kept privately with the report and only you and the aiKit team can open them; each view uses a link that stops working after a few minutes. A short automatic summary of each report helps the team find the right part of aiKit faster.

Yes. One report can carry up to 10 files: pictures (PNG, JPEG, WebP, animated GIF, or an iPhone HEIC photo) and PDFs up to 25 MB each, and screen recordings or other videos (MP4, MOV or WebM) up to 250 MB each. Pick several at once, drag them onto the form, or paste screenshots one after another. Each file gets its own thumbnail, an X to remove it, and its own progress bar while it sends; a file that's too big or not an accepted kind says so under its name, and one that fails to send has Try again without affecting the rest. If your recording is already online, paste its Loom, Google Drive or YouTube link in Video link instead. GIFs keep moving and videos play right on your report's page.

Signed in, open Your reports from Settings, or press See your report right after sending one. The list shows every report you sent, newest first, each with its number and status. Open one to see what you sent, your pictures, videos and PDFs, and a status line in plain words: Received, We're looking into it, A fix is being made, A fix is ready and being checked, Fixed, or Closed without a change. If the aiKit team wrote back, their reply appears under Our reply. You only ever see your own reports, never anyone else's. Reports sent while signed out don't appear in a list, which is why the form asks for an optional email. Either way you're told: signed in, every status change and reply lands on your bell (and by email if you choose); signed out with an email, you get an email for each one once email is switched on for aiKit.

Design Contest is in early access and not yet open to every account. You describe what you need (a logo, badge, business card, postcard, brochure, flyer, social media post, poster, or website banner), and 2 to 6 AI designers, each with their own style, submit one concept each. Each concept is made by a real image model you choose. You compare them, ask for changes in your own words, and pick a winner to download as PNG or print-ready SVG. The designers are AI and are always labeled that way.

Yes. In Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), the change box under each concept takes any request in plain words, such as "make the name bolder and drop the tagline" or "use the blue from concept 2". The example buttons are only shortcuts. If any part can't be done, the new version lists it first under Not done yet with the reason, and every earlier version is kept.

Yes. Press Mark up on a concept, drag a box around any spot on the design, and type what should change there; you can box several spots, each with its own note. Attach files adds up to 5 pictures (PNG, JPG or WebP) to any change, such as a photo to use or a look you like. The designer sees your numbered boxes on the design; the boxes never appear in the new version. Every version stays: open a concept full screen to switch between v1, v2 and so on, zoom from 25% to 600%, and download the PNG of the version you're looking at.

Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts) makes every concept with a real image model, and each AI designer card shows its model with example pictures so you can see what you'll get. A contest starts with one designer that expands your brief into a rich, art-directed prompt, plus designers on a mix of the best-looking models that are switched on; tap any designer's model to switch it. The studio shows how many tokens the contest uses before you start. Any concept can be turned into a print-ready SVG afterwards.

Yes. In Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), the brief asks for the content of the piece you picked: the front and back of a business card; a postcard's front, and its back too if you choose Front and back (with room left for the mailing address); one box per panel for a tri-fold, bi-fold or Z-fold brochure; and a headline, details and call to action for flyers, posters, social posts and banners. Everything is optional and every box has a microphone. The designers deliver complete marketing pieces with a rich background, headline, benefit points and a call to action: they use your exact words where you gave them, write the rest from your brief, and never invent phone numbers, prices, dates or addresses.

Yes. In Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), the contest starts with a race start (Designers, start your engines!) and opens on a lineup of every entry side by side in the middle of the screen. With some models, each picture appears as a rough first pass and sharpens into the finished design while you watch. Press any picture to see it full screen and zoom into a close-up. You choose who is on the team with Add a designer, and business cards and two-sided postcards are made as a separate front and back so the type stays crisp.

Yes. In Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), every print item (business cards, postcards, flyers, posters and banners) has a Size row with the common sizes and a custom width × height in inches or feet; banners include 2 × 6 ft, 3 × 6 ft, 3 × 8 ft, 4 × 8 ft and a 33 × 80 in retractable stand. The concepts come out in exactly your shape, and very wide or tall pieces are made so nothing on them is cut off.

Yes. In Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), concepts from a vector model are real vector SVG from the start. For a concept made by a picture model, Make print-ready SVG traces it into clean vector shapes: a dedicated vector tracer when it's switched on, otherwise the free tracer Logo Kit uses. The card says which one ran and warns when color blends became flat colors. Every concept also downloads as PNG.

Yes. When you start a contest in Design Contest (coming soon for most accounts), add up to 10 PNG, JPG, or WebP pictures and mark each as My current logo (kept recognizable), Inspiration (the feel is borrowed, never copied), or Must include (it has to appear in the design). Every AI designer looks at them, and models that take pictures also receive them as style pictures. Every text box also has a microphone, so you can say your brief instead of typing it. Style directions come from a gallery of 42 styles with an example picture each, and you can add your own style in words; your styles are saved to your account.

Gobo Proof Studio is in early access and not yet open to every account. It turns the logo a customer sends for a custom gobo (the small disc a logo projector shines through) into a proof the customer approves from their phone and a print-ready file for the gobo maker. It works like a gobo artist you talk to: each upload is checked for resolution first, then the AI artist looks at every file and reads your words, and makes the gobo the way you asked. Nothing is changed on its own: a white background usually becomes black so only the logo projects, and colors change only when you or your customer ask. When something is unclear, like what color a black logo on white should be, it asks before making anything. The art is placed on a round gobo at your size (37.5 mm by default; 53, 54, 86 mm, or any size you enter), filling 92% of the disc (98% when the art is itself round, like a badge). The print-ready file is a CMYK PDF with a flat black background, exactly the gobo's size. The proof shows the gobo, the sizes, and one mock-up, As it projects. Every job keeps the client's original, every version, the print file, and the proof, organized by client and searchable by your own job number.

In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), the AI artist looks at the whole file before making anything. Several logos on one sheet (or one per page of a PDF) are each made as their own design in the same job, cut from the sheet, each with its own proof, versions, and print-ready file, unless your words say otherwise (for example, make the whole sheet one gobo). One customer link still shows every design. An icon with its own words counts as one logo. If it isn't clear what you want, it asks first.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), the Request a change or add files box sits right under every finished proof (it opens as soon as the proof is ready). With several designs in the job, pick All designs (your words decide which ones change; logo 2 means Design 2 as the Proofs cards are numbered) or one design, or use the Change this one box on that design's card; designs you don't name stay exactly as they are. Add files with the Add files button, by dropping them on the box, or by pasting a picture; each file shows its upload progress. Then say in your words what each file is for, like use this new logo file or match the red in this photo: the AI artist looks at the files with your words and makes the next version. A request with files needs words. Every original stays under The client's files (all of the job's uploads, as pictures) and every added file under Files in this design, with downloads, so you can always see what a proof was made from. Earlier files and versions are never replaced or lost.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), Branding on the customer proof sits right under the proof and can be changed at any time, also after the proof link went out. Your logo uses your Shop profile's logo and name. Another company puts a reseller's or client's name on it, picked from your saved companies or typed in, with an optional logo (PNG, JPEG, or SVG). No logo makes a plain white-label proof: no logo or company name on the sheet, on the customer's proof page, in the PDF's file properties, or in the file names. Only the customer proof is drawn again, with no AI and no charge; the print file stays exactly the same. Tick Start every new job with No logo and every new job starts white label. The proof image and PDF you download are 300 dpi on an 11 × 7.33 in sheet (3300 × 2200 pixels), sharp enough to send to a vendor.

In Gobo Proof Studio, coming soon for most accounts, the resolution check runs before anything else. It works from 600 dots per inch across 96% of the disc (a little more than the art really uses, to be safe), so a 37.5 mm gobo needs about 850 pixels across. Each file gets a grade (High, Good, Marginal, Low but usable, or Low; vector files are graded Vector). If a file would be enlarged more than 2 times, nothing is made until you choose: go ahead anyway (often fine for a bold, simple design), redraw it as clean shapes, ask the client for a better file, or upload a better file now. The first file stays on the job either way. While it waits, nothing is running, so there is no spinner: the design's card shows your file with an amber ring and a Waiting for your choice badge, the jobs list says Waiting for your choice: go ahead, redraw it as clean shapes, or get a better file, and instructions you typed say they start after you choose.

Gobo Proof Studio's projection calculator (coming soon for most accounts) takes the mounting distance, the exact width and/or height the art must land at, and the lens, and makes the art at exactly that scale. A gobo lens number is the image size divided by the distance, so a 1:0.33 lens makes a 3.3 ft image from 10 ft, and the industry throw ratio for the same lens is 3.0:1. The art's own box is what gets sized, not the round light around it, so a wide logo set to 6 ft wide lands 6 ft wide. If the size can't be reached at that distance with that lens, it says Not possible here, what the lens tops out at, and offers the smallest common lens that reaches it or the distance that works with your lens. If you give both sides and the art's shape doesn't match (for example 3:1 art for a 10 ft × 4 ft space), it fits the art inside and says what it really lands at. It also checks the thinnest lines in the art against rules of thumb (0.15 mm on the glass, about a quarter inch on the wall) and shows the math.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio's calculator (coming soon for most accounts), choose Floor, at an angle and enter the lens height above the floor along with the mounting distance and the width and depth the art must land at. A projector shining down at an angle stretches the image front to back and makes the far edge wider (keystone), so with Correct for the angle on, the art is pre-shaped on the gobo so it lands square at your size. For example, crosswalk stripes 10 ft × 4 ft from 25 ft, with the lens 15 ft up (53° from straight down), land 10 ft × 4 ft; without the correction they would land about 6 ft 9 in front to back and 11 ft 2 in wide at the far edge. The proof says Projects 10 ft × 4 ft at 25 ft, notes the angle, and, at steep angles, how much dimmer the far edge is, so the client can check the real size before approving.

A gobo works by letting light through, so black parts block the light and show as nothing on the wall. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), a black background is already the gobo's dark area, and a white background usually becomes black too, so only the logo projects. That's why, when a black logo sits on a white background, nothing is made until you say what color the logo should be (dark gray, white, or another color): the job asks first and waits for your answer. Instructions that already say the color skip the question. Dark real colors such as navy, dark green, or maroon do project, as color, so they are never changed unless you ask. On a wall, every color looks lighter and softer than on a screen.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts) you type what you want with the upload or any time after, the way you'd tell a designer: "make the white text yellow", "change the red to PMS 286", "make the black parts dark gray", "make it one color white", "remove the box behind the lettering", "remove the tagline", "invert it", "thicken the thin lines", or "make it an outline". The AI artist reads your words with the files and makes exactly that: it changes colors (a name, a hex code, or a PMS number, shown as its closest screen color because a gobo prints in CMYK), one part's color, removes a color, an area, or a background, makes outlines, thickens or thins lines, resizes, turns, or flips the art. It changes nothing nobody asked for, and asks one short question first when your words could mean two different proofs. Instructions typed with the upload are used for the first proof. Each change makes a new version with a short note of what was done; earlier versions stay under Versions, and Show this one brings one back. The client's original file is always kept.

Yes. Every version in Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts) has one mock-up, As it projects: a projector hung above shines the logo onto a floor in a dark room, in the proof's own colors, with the light falling off a little toward the edge as a real projection does. The same picture is on the proof sheet. When you enter the mounting distance, the width and/or height it should land at, and the lens (before the upload or later on the job page), it's drawn at the real size, and the proof, the job page, and the customer's link all say what it lands at, for example Projects 10 ft × 4 ft at 25 ft. Without the room settings, it shows an example size of about 4 ft and says so.

In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), press Make the proof link on the job and copy the private link into your own email or text; aiKit doesn't send it for you. One link shows every design in the job. Your customer opens it on any phone or computer without an account, swipes through the designs (or uses the arrows on a computer), looks at each design on a wall and as a proof, can look back at earlier versions, and presses Approve or Request changes with a note for each design. Each design gets one answer; answers show on the job and in your jobs list, and aiKit emails your account when one arrives. A new link after changes starts fresh answers, so an earlier approval never covers newer art. The customer sees only the proofs, never the print-ready file.

Only if you ask. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), nothing is removed on its own. On a gobo, a solid colored box behind a logo projects as one block of light, so a customer often wants only the lettering: type remove the yellow box, or lettering only, and the artist clears the box and keeps the lettering in its own colors. Leave it, and the box projects as part of the design. The one change it makes without being asked is the usual one: a white page around the logo goes black so it doesn't light up.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts) a job holds as many designs as the customer needs. Drop several logo files at once and each becomes a design; type a full-color and a lettering-only version of each and both are made for every file; or ask on any design for more versions, like a one-color white and an outline version. Each design keeps its own versions, the designs are grouped by the file they came from, and one customer link shows them all for the customer to approve one by one.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), ask for them in words, with the upload or in the change box: gobos that say Happy Hour, Restaurant Open, Tonight Taco Special makes one for each phrase. The words are laid out on 1 to 3 lines in a color that goes with the logo (or the one you name), fit inside the gobo with a margin. Change one in plain words: make it say Taco Tuesday, put tonight on its own line, use the condensed font, bigger. Each message gobo is its own design in the job, with its own versions and print-ready file, and it shows on the customer link with the logo.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), EPS, AI, PDF, and SVG files are all read as vector art, graded Vector, and stay sharp at any gobo size. EPS files are converted on our server with Ghostscript, and AI files are read through the PDF content Illustrator saves inside them (an AI file saved without it asks for a PDF or SVG export instead). On the upload form, pictures, SVG, PDF, and AI files with PDF content show their preview right away; a browser can't draw an EPS file, so its tile shows an EPS badge with the file's name and size, and the real preview appears on the job page as soon as the server has converted it.

The job tells you what happened in plain words, and the aiKit team gets the real error at the same moment. For example, if our file storage is full, the job says Our file storage is full right now, and we're fixing it, rather than asking you to upload again. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), the stopped job keeps its name, client, size, room, and instructions, and all the files of one upload stay in one job. Its page has Try again, which runs the stopped designs again in the same job with the same files: they are kept in your browser until the server has them, so you usually don't choose them again; on another computer or in a private window, Try again asks you to choose them first. One press of the upload button always makes one job, even if the request is sent twice.

It tells you plainly. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), the AI artist answers every request in a short reply: what it made and what it changed, or why it didn't. It never makes a placeholder to ask about; when your words could mean two different things, it asks one short question first and makes nothing until you answer. Every version it makes stays under Versions, so if a change isn't what you wanted, Show this one brings back an earlier version and the next change starts from it.

Yes. In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), delete a whole job from the … menu on its row in the jobs list, or check several rows and press Delete selected; on the job page, Delete job is in the … menu beside the job name, and Delete this design is in the … menu on each design card (the job and its other designs stay). Before anything is deleted, a confirm names what goes: the designs, every version, the print-ready files and proofs, the uploaded logo files, and the customer proof link. Nothing is removed right away: deleted work sits in Recently deleted (a button at the top of the jobs list) for 30 days, and Restore puts it back where it was, customer link included. Undo also shows right after a delete. After 30 days the job or design and its files are removed for good. A design that is being made right now is deleted after it finishes: press Delete again then.

In Gobo Proof Studio (coming soon for most accounts), the delete confirm warns you when a customer proof link was sent. After you delete the whole job, the customer's link shows a plain page that says This proof is no longer available, with no pictures or names; restore the job within 30 days and the same link works again. If you delete only one design, the link keeps working and shows the job's other designs.

aiKit Hub is aiKit's project tool for running work with your team and your clients in one place. Each project has a Message Board, Boards (Trello-style lists of cards you drag), To-dos, a Schedule, Docs & Files, Campfire chat and Check-ins. Any to-do list can be shown as a list, a board, a table, a calendar, a timeline or a dashboard, and plain-English rules move cards and notify people for you. Clients you invite see only what you switch to Clients see this. For example, a made-up sign shop could run each customer's job as a project, share the proof and pickup date with the customer, and keep pricing notes team-only. On the Free plan the Hub starts with boards: up to 3 boards, each with its cards, a Message Board and Files, for 1 team member (you) and 1 GB; projects (more boards in one place, Chat, Schedule, clients and the AI helpers) come with the Starter plan ($18.88) and up. Open it at aikit.ai/tools/hub.

Open the Hub's People page and look at the Invites panel under the list. Each invite shows the person's email, role, who invited them and when, and a status: Pending (sent, not joined yet, with the date the link stops working), Accepted (with the date they joined), Expired (60 days went by) or Cancelled. The Hub's owner or an admin can press Resend on a Pending or Expired invite to email a fresh link to the same person, or Cancel invite to stop the link and free the seat. Team members can see the statuses but not change them.

It combines both. From Basecamp it takes the calm project home, the message board, check-ins, the Hill Chart, Lineup and per-item client access; from Trello it takes boards, labels, checklists, custom fields, card covers, voting, card aging and Butler-style automation. Then it adds things neither does: every list flips between list, board, table, calendar, timeline and dashboard; team-only notes inside threads your client can see; a Preview as client button; rules with no monthly run limit; and links to your aiKit quotes, proofs, print jobs and bookings that update the card when a customer accepts or approves. You can import from Basecamp, Trello, Asana, ClickUp, Monday, Notion, Jira or a spreadsheet.

Only what you share. In a client project everything starts team-only, and each list, to-do, message, event, doc, folder or link has a Clients see this / Team only switch. A client sees an item only when it and everything above it are shared, and never sees check-ins, logged time, emailed-in messages, print jobs, costs or other customers. Your team can add a Team-only note inside a shared thread that the client never sees. Clients can comment, post messages, add files, answer approvals and check off to-dos assigned to them. Press Preview as client to see the project exactly the way they will.

When you press New project (or New board on the Free plan), Who's on it sits right under the name. Tap the people from your Hub you want on it, or press My usual people to add the people you work with most, or Everyone on my team. To bring in someone new, type their email and press Add; the invite is emailed as soon as you start, unless you untick Email them the invite now. Only the people you pick see it and get its updates, and you can change the list any time on its People tab.

A board is one piece of work as lists of cards you drag along, like To do → Doing → Done; each board also has a Message Board and a Files tab. A project is a bigger home that can hold several boards plus Chat, a Schedule, To-do lists, Check-ins, time tracking, clients and guests, and AI helpers like Catch me up and Summarize this board. The Free plan starts with boards: Home is My boards, with up to 3 boards. Turn into a project, on any board, shows what a project adds; projects come with the Starter plan ($18.88) and up, and upgrading keeps every board, message and file where it is. Paid plans open on projects, each with every tool.

The Hub is included in every aiKit plan. Free covers 3 boards (active and archived together), each with its cards, a Message Board and Files, for 1 team member (you), with 1 GB of files and files up to 25 MB; Chat, the Schedule, clients and guests, the AI helpers and more boards per project come with projects on paid plans (on paid plans only active projects count). Starter ($18.88) includes 1 team member, 10 client seats, 5 projects and 10 GB; Pro ($48.88) includes 3 team members, 50 client seats, 25 projects and 50 GB; Team ($88.88) includes 5 team members, 150 client seats, no project limit and 150 GB; Business ($198.88) includes 7 team members, 300 client seats and 250 GB; Agency ($348.88) includes 10 team members, 500 client seats and 400 GB. Free needs no card. On paid plans you can add storage: +50 GB for $8.88, +150 GB for $18.88 or +500 GB for $48.88 a month, and when an add-on would cost more than the next plan up, the Hub recommends the plan instead. Going over a limit never adds a charge: you get a heads-up at 80% of a limit, and at 100% of storage only new uploads pause. Plans and add-ons are chosen and paid on Settings → Billing. There's no per-person fee and no limit on how often rules run. Settings → Plan & storage shows what you use against each limit.

Yes. Import accepts a Trello board's JSON export, CSV exports from Asana, ClickUp, Monday.com, Notion and Jira, any spreadsheet (you match the columns), and Basecamp. You see a preview first, choose which projects to bring and who's who, and decide about finished to-dos and files. To-dos keep their lists or columns, assignees, due dates, labels, checklists and comments. People from the other app become invites that are never emailed until you send them. The import runs in the background with a progress bar, ends with a report of anything that didn't come over, and Undo removes everything it added. A direct Connect button for Basecamp, Trello and Asana is being switched on; it uses their own approval page, and aiKit never asks for your password. Until then, a Basecamp export comes in as docs (one per page), and Trello and Asana exports bring everything listed above.

Yes. Every project in aiKit Hub has a Boards tab, and a project can hold several boards. A board is lists side by side with cards you drag between them and drag to reorder; you drag the lists too. Cards have labels with names and colors, members, start and due dates with reminders you can time per card, named checklists with progress, attachments with a cover picture, comments and an activity log. Each board has a background color or photo, filters for label, member and due date, a search box, archive and restore for cards and lists, and Table, Calendar, Timeline and Dashboard views of the same cards. Every card has its own link that opens it on its board. My boards gathers every board you can open, starred ones first, with an Inbox for quick notes and a Planner month of dated cards.

Yes. Press and hold a card for a moment, then drag it up or down or onto another list; a quick swipe still scrolls the board. Every card also has a Move… button that picks the board, the list and the position from menus, which is easier on a small screen and works with a keyboard too (tab to a card and press M). Lists can be moved from their own menu with Move left, Move right or Move to a position. Two people can work on the same board at once: moving a card changes only that card, so nobody's move undoes someone else's, and no card is ever lost.

Yes. Any card on an aiKit Hub board can link a quote, quote sheet, customer proof, prepress job, booking or website request from your own account (plus gobo jobs and logo clean-ups where your account has those tools). The card shows the record's live status, such as Accepted or Customer approved, and opens it in its own tool. Start in a tool on a card opens a new quote sheet or prepress job in a new tab, and the job you make links itself back to the card. In the board's Menu you pick the list where new website requests, bookings and quote requests become cards, and the list a card moves to when its quote is accepted or its proof is approved. Clients never see links to internal jobs or costs.

Yes. New board opens on From a template with five starters: Print job, Sign job, Website build, Event and Restaurant opening. Each brings its lists, named labels, card templates with checklists, rules (for example, a print job card moves to Approved when its quote is accepted) and where new website requests land. Templates never add made-up customers or jobs. Any board can be saved with Menu → Save this board as a template, with or without its cards, and your team then sees it under From a template marked Yours. Single cards can be saved as card templates and added from Add a card.

Yes. In a board's Menu → Rules, type the rule as a sentence, for example “When a card moves to Install, make it due in 3 days and notify the people on it,” and press Set it up. aiKit's AI helper turns it into a rule using only that board's real lists, labels and people, shows it in plain words, and saves it only when you press Save this rule. If the sentence names a list or person the board doesn't have, it tells you instead of guessing. Rules can move a card, check off its checklist, set a due date, add a label, assign or notify people, and they run without a monthly limit. Due-date reminders reach the people on a card in Hey! and by email, 1 day before unless you pick another time.

Yes. Open the project's Boards tab and press Import from Trello. In Trello, open the board and choose Menu (…) → Print, export and share → Export as JSON, then drop that file in. aiKit shows how many cards and comments it found and matches the Trello members to people already in your Hub by name. Bring it over adds a new board to that project with its lists, cards, labels in their Trello colors, named checklists, comments, start and due dates, and links to the attachments. Someone who isn't in your Hub keeps their name on their comments. Anyone on the project's team can do this, and Undo this import, right when it finishes, removes the board again.

Yes. In a project's Message Board, write a message and press Attach files or drag files onto it, up to 10 at a time, each within your plan's file size (25 MB on Free). The button then reads Post with 2 files, for example. The files show under the message: pictures as thumbnails, PDFs as a PDF card, everything else with an icon, each with a Download button and its own page with versions and comments, where a PDF can be previewed right in the page. Comments take files the same way. Files follow the message or comment they're on, so a file on a team-only note is never shown to a client, and a client can attach files to what they post. Every file counts toward your plan's storage.

Nothing is lost. An archived project keeps every message, comment, to-do, doc and file with all their versions. It moves to the Archived tab on the Hub's home, stays in search, and its files stay downloadable; they still count toward storage. It becomes read-only for everyone (nothing can be added, edited, checked off or deleted inside it), and clients on it keep reading what was shared with them. On paid plans with a project limit, archived projects don't use a slot, so archiving makes room; on Free, the 3 projects count active and archived together. Bring it back with one click from the project's page, its card on the Archived tab, or its Settings. Deleting is different: a deleted project waits in the trash for 30 days, where an owner or admin can restore it, and is then removed for good with its files. You can also export any project as a .zip at any time.

Yes. Press the download button in a project's header (or Export in its Settings). The Hub builds one .zip in your browser with everything in the project you can see: index.html to read every message, comment, to-do list, doc, event and Campfire line in any browser; project.json with every record, for moving to another tool; and a files folder with every file version. You can leave the files out for a small text-only export. Downloading the files counts toward the month's download allowance, and exports over 750 MB of files hold the text while big files are downloaded from Docs & Files. Exporting is for the project's team.

Yes. Each person has a company, and a project's People tab shows our team first and then each outside company by name. When you post a message (or share a to-do, event, doc, file or folder), Who sees this offers Our team only, Our team plus one company, or Our team plus everyone outside. A company sees only what's shared with it, including the comments and files under it, and never another company's posts or internal ones. That's checked on every page, search, activity list, notification, email, export and file download, and changing a post's audience later takes effect right away. Posts carry a badge, Our team only or Visible to: Our team and the company names, and Preview as shows exactly what one company sees.

Yes, by default each update comes as its own email: when you're added to a project, a board is made in a project you're on, a message or order is posted to you, someone comments or replies on something you follow or a card you're on, and when rules notify you. Mentions and replies to your own comment always come right away. In Settings → Notifications, Hub: comments and updates can switch to a daily summary, a weekly roundup on Mondays, the bell only, or off, and quiet hours hold emails overnight. The Hub never emails anyone about something they can't see.

Yes. Post one message per order or job (put the job number in the title), attach the proof, and reply in the thread as it moves along. The list shows who posted it, the title, the latest reply, the proof's picture, the date, a reply count and an Archive button; Open and Archived switch lists, Sorted by picks Newest, Latest reply or Oldest, and the filter box finds a job number. A client you invite to the project can post orders and reply, and sees only what's shared with them.

Yes. Chat at the top of the Hub opens on the Team room, one conversation for everyone on your team across all projects; clients and guests never see it, and only people you @mention get an email. Pings, in the same place, are private conversations with one person or a few. Each project also has its own Campfire chat.

Yes, if you switch it on: Settings → Notifications → Hub: morning AI digest → Weekday mornings. From 7 a.m. your time, Monday to Friday, you get a short outline of every project you're on: urgent and late work, new orders and replies, what's due this week, and linked quotes, proofs and jobs. Quiet days are skipped with no AI used. Each digest uses a small part of your account's tokens.

Yes, on a Mac or a PC. Drag files from Finder or File Explorer onto About this project, About this board, any open card, the comment box, a new message, Chat or Docs & Files; the area lights up and several files at once are fine. You can also paste a screenshot with Cmd+V or Ctrl+V. Large files upload with a progress percentage, and anything that can't be added (over your plan's size, or a program like .exe) says why.

Open the project's Docs & Files and press All files: it lists every file in the project, whether it was attached to a card, a comment, a message, an About box or uploaded to Docs & Files, with a picture, size, who added it, when, and a link to where it lives. Filter by type, place or person, search by name, preview pictures and PDFs, download, rename or delete. Files at the top of the Hub shows the same thing across all your projects, with a Project filter. You only see files you're allowed to see in each project.

Every project card on Hub home and every board tile on a project's Boards tab has a ⋯ menu with Rename, Move earlier, Move later and Delete…. Delete asks once, then shows Undo; deleted projects stay in Trash for 30 days, and a board can be kept out of the way with Menu → Archive this board instead. To reorder, drag a card or tile (press and hold first on a phone, or use Alt and the arrow keys); the new order is shared with your whole team.

Yes. A card opens in a big window: the cover picture, the list it's in, the title with a Done button, Members, Labels, Dates, Mark urgent, the description with Show more, checklists you cross off with a progress bar, attachments with thumbnails, and on the right the comments and activity with Reply on every comment. Urgent cards get a red tag, move to the top of their list, and have their own filter. Every card has its own link.

Each project has a default under People → Who's notified by default: Just our team (the starting choice), Everyone on the project, or a list you pick. People from outside companies are never in a default until the Hub's owner, an admin or whoever started the project switches on Include people from outside companies. On each message the person posting can change it with Project default, Our team, Everyone who can see it, or Pick people, and a line names who'll be told. The Hub never notifies or emails anyone who can't see the post.

Yes. In the Hub's Settings, What you call your work offers Projects (the default), Jobs, Clients or Orders. The owner or an admin picks one with a click, and it changes for everyone in that Hub: the first tab, the New button, Home's tabs and filters, empty pages, plan limits and messages, and the invite email. A print shop that runs each order as its own project, for example, can call them Jobs. Nothing else changes.

Yes, as plain-English rules and buttons on each list. A rule starts when a card moves to a column, a to-do is checked off or added, or its linked quote is accepted or proof approved or sent back with changes. It then moves the card, checks it off, assigns someone, adds a label, notifies the people on it, its watchers or the client, sets a due date, or shares it with the client. Each rule reads back as a sentence, like “When a card moves to Done, check it off and notify the client.” Buttons run the same steps on one card in one press. Rules never trigger other rules, and there's no monthly limit on runs.

The AI helpers are optional: an Ask box where your team can ask anything about the project in plain words (who's behind, what's due Friday, draft an update for the client), Summarize this week, What's at risk, Summarize on any board, Catch me up on everything on the Hub home (one outline across every project, with the quotes, proofs and jobs linked to them), Turn a message or email into to-dos, and Draft a check-in recap. Each run uses a small part of one token (tokens are your monthly AI allowance; 1 token = 1¢ of AI), the same tokens as aiKit's other tools, and plans also have a monthly fair-use number of helper runs. The AI only reads what the person pressing the button can already see, clients never run it, and nothing it writes is added until you choose to add it.

Trading Copilot is an aiKit tool for people who trade stocks, options and crypto. It keeps your positions in one place with live, delayed prices and profit and loss, finds trade ideas that fit your own trading profile using real option chains (exact expiration dates and strikes with bid and ask), turns a bigger budget into a planned set of trades (Wealth Builder ∞), and explains every trade in plain English. You can paper trade in Practice mode, import positions from a broker screenshot, research any symbol with charts, news and an AI company brief, and ask a chat that knows your positions. It is education and record-keeping only: it never places trades, aiKit is not an investment adviser, and you make every decision. Open it at aikit.ai/tools/trading.

No. Trading Copilot never places, sends or changes an order at any broker. It suggests ideas, sizes them to your budget, and records the trades you tell it you made, at the fill prices you enter. Position rows read from a screenshot are only saved after you check each one. Ideas are generated by AI from delayed public data and can be wrong, so always check live prices with your broker before you trade.

It learns your style from the trades in your own book, including positions imported from a broker screenshot: which trades you make (for example token spreads and iron condors), how many days out, how far from the price you sell (delta), how wide your spreads are, how many contracts you trade, and your tickers. Find ideas shows it as one editable sentence under My trading style. With Use my style on, ideas, Wealth Builder plans and Suggest trades for this are built that way from the live option chain, on your tickers first and then similar ones, and each idea says Matches your style or Different from your usual and why. Your style wins over Simple mode; a budget or max loss per trade still caps the size. Tested against a real premium seller's book, ideas matched his trade type, expiration, strike distance, width, size and tickers on every idea, up from under a third before.

Open My copilot trades. It lists only trades the copilot suggested (from Find ideas or a Wealth Builder plan) that you placed at your broker and recorded with Log this trade, one row each: the trade in plain words, your entry, the live value (for a spread, each leg at the middle of its bid and ask, added up), profit and loss in dollars and percent, days left, stop and target, a status (On track, Near stop, Near target, Expiring soon) and Log the close, Roll it and Ask about it. Original idea opens the idea as it was suggested. Everything else you hold, such as Schwab or screenshot imports, is in Portfolio, which can filter by where each position came from.

You enter an amount, for example $10,000 over 3 months, your risk, the stocks to use, and how many trades (or let the AI decide). If anything important is unclear, the copilot asks up to 3 quick questions first. It then splits the money into several trades that fit your profile, using real option prices, shows the dollars and share of the plan for each trade, and explains the overall plan and the order to enter the trades. A trade that would need more cash than the plan has is removed. The plan is saved to your account even if you leave the page while it builds, and it tracks its own profit or loss as you log its trades.

Every option idea is checked against the live (delayed) option chain before you see it. The contract has to exist, and the cost, max loss and gain, breakeven, number of contracts that fit your budget, stop and target are calculated from the real bid and ask, not written by the AI. Ideas over your budget, needing shares you don't own, with very low odds, or built on a contract that doesn't exist are left out, and the summary says why. Each idea also carries honest cautions, such as low odds, earnings before expiration, a stretched chart, a wide bid/ask spread or a fearful market, and when nothing is worth taking it says so instead of forcing trades.

Yes. While Ask about a trade works (usually 30 to 60 seconds), a live list shows each real step as it happens, with a check mark and the numbers it found: the trade it read from your words, the live price and trend, the next earnings date, your exact contract, your past trades, how many real contracts it priced and across which dates, implied volatility and recent moves, and then the risk-versus-reward weighing that ends in the verdict, with a clock of the seconds so far. After the answer, What this is based on lists the case for and against, every data point used with its source and the time it was taken, and the assumptions behind the numbers. It is information and analysis, not personalized advice, and it never places trades.

So the cost and risk you see are for one contract, the plainest way to compare ideas. Each idea starts at 1 contract, or at your usual size once Trading Copilot has learned your style from your own trades. Your budget per trade only caps the size. On an idea's page, Size to my budget shows it at the most contracts your budget and max loss allow, with every amount updated, and Back to 1 contract undoes it. Reward vs risk is worked out from each trade's real payoff, so it differs from idea to idea.

Yes. When you ask about a trade, the first thing you see is a verdict: Good idea, Good idea with care, Risky, Bad idea or Wait for a better price (or Hold, Take profit, Cut it or Roll it for a trade you already have), with the main reasons and real numbers behind them. It says Risky or Bad idea when that's the honest answer, for example when an earnings report lands inside every expiration or the breakeven needs a big move in little time. It also lays several real option trades side by side at different strikes and dates, so you can see which one fits, and labels spreads and other choices as alternatives. It's information and analysis, not personalized financial advice.

Yes. Ask about a trade answers in any words, for example What do you think about buying calls 30 to 240 days out for Bloom Energy? or I bought 2 NVDA 230 calls at 6.40, should I sell? It starts with a plain verdict (Good idea, Good idea with care, Risky, Bad idea or Wait for a better price; or Hold, Take profit, Cut it or Roll it for a trade you're in) and the two or three main reasons, using the live price, trend, implied volatility and an estimated IV rank, the earnings date, and your own trading style and holdings. Then it compares 4 to 8 real contracts across the dates and strikes you asked about, priced from the live (delayed) option chain: cost per contract, breakeven and the move it needs, delta, time decay per day, IV, max loss and a rough chance of profit, with a one-line take and the best fit for how you trade marked. Every contract gets a plain-words evaluation, and a spread and other alternatives are shown where they fit. It's information and analysis, not personalized financial advice, with the time the prices were taken; the copilot never places trades.

A company page shows the price chart and key stats, the next earnings date with the EPS estimate, how the stock reacted to the last report and how it has done since, the last four quarters of results against estimates, the dividend with its ex-dividend and pay dates, analyst targets and recent rating changes, and what the company does. AI earnings-call recaps summarize the last three reports and what has changed since; each is made once per report and shared, so it's instant for the next person. Search is spelling-tolerant, and you can add any company or option contract to watchlists: My watchlist for everything, plus your own lists with an optional goal (Swing trades, Long-term investing, Dividend income, Options income, Earnings plays, Crypto or General).

Yes. Under the assistant box, Writing model picks the model that writes and edits the words and layout: Auto, Fast (quickest, about half the cost of Balanced), Balanced (about 1 to 4 cents an edit), or Best (the strongest writer, about 2½ times Balanced). Picture model, next to it, picks the model for new pictures. Both are remembered in your browser.

Yes. Press Add from Graphics (under Start from a design, or in the ⋯ menu), pick any picture from your Graphics Library, and it goes into the email as a photo section after the one you selected. Every photo spot in an email can also be changed to a library picture by clicking it.

Email Studio is aiKit's tool for designing marketing emails: welcome series, promos, newsletters, review asks, abandoned-cart reminders, and win-back emails. You start from a layout in your brand colors, the AI assistant writes it in your Brand Voice, and you change anything by clicking it in the email itself. It has 23 section types (hero photo, product cards, photo collage, photo animation, offer code, customer's cart, blog posts, and more), desktop, phone, and dark-mode previews, and live spam and accessibility checks. When an email is ready you export the HTML, send a test to yourself, or save it to your own Klaviyo account as a template. For example, a made-up bakery could build a three-email welcome series in an afternoon and save it to Klaviyo. Open it at aikit.ai/tools/email-studio.

Yes. In the Tool library, press Preview on Email Studio. It opens the real editor, live, on a starter Welcome email in the default brand colors with aiKit's own sample photos. Click any section to edit it in place, type over any words, add sections from the library, and switch between Desktop, Phone, and Dark mode; the spam and accessibility checks update as you go. The assistant makes layout, link, and button changes there the same way the full tool does. Nothing in the preview is saved or sent, and no AI is charged; rewriting the words in your Brand Voice, test emails, and Klaviyo are in the full tool. Press Add to put Email Studio in one of your kits.

No. Nothing in Email Studio sends to your list. Send test goes only to your own sign-in address, with [TEST] in the subject. Push to Klaviyo saves the email as a template in your Klaviyo account, and a template sends nothing by itself: you add it to a flow or campaign in Klaviyo when you're ready. You can also export the HTML and paste it into any email tool.

It sorts every request before it writes anything. Requests about layout ("two per row", "side by side"), links ("the button should go to the pricing page"), swapping a product card, adding a new button, or making the headline smaller are done directly on those settings by fixed rules, without touching any words. Only requests about wording go to the AI writer. After each change you see what changed in plain words, with Undo, and the last 20 changes are in AI history. The assistant never changes a photo or invents a link, price, or code; those rules are enforced in code, not just asked for.

Yes. In Email settings, paste a Klaviyo Private API key with Templates set to Full access and Accounts to Read. aiKit checks the key with Klaviyo, stores it encrypted, and never shows it again. Push to Klaviyo then saves each email as a template (and updates the same template on later pushes). Before pushing it checks every link and stops if any don't open, unless you choose Push anyway. The Customer's cart section becomes Klaviyo's cart loop, so each customer sees their own items, and the footer gets Klaviyo's unsubscribe link. Mailchimp and other tools work through Export or copy HTML.

Yes. Import a design → choose your .html file (up to 400 KB, from Klaviyo, Mailchimp, a designer, or any email tool) → Open my design. It opens exactly as designed, with no AI and no tokens used: only what an email can never carry, like scripts and forms, is taken out. Then change it by asking in your own words (for example "replace the second product with my Winter Birch Candle" or "make the big button dark green") or by clicking any words, picture, button, or section. Only the parts you name change; everything else stays exactly as uploaded, and the parts that changed light up green so you can see it. You can also ask for a full redesign ("make it more modern") in any language: the body is rebuilt in a modern, phone-friendly layout that keeps your logo, footer, brand colors and links, and Undo brings the original back. Paste a web address and the assistant reads that page and uses its real products, prices and photos.

No. Each request becomes small changes to the exact parts it names, applied by code to your email, so everything else stays the same character for character. If a request needs a related fix (swapping a product also swaps its photo, price, and link), that is listed in What the assistant changed. Anything it couldn't do is listed first under Not done, with the reason, and every change has Undo.

Yes, once they're in Your products. Read my website pulls each product's real name, price, page, and photo from a Shopify or WooCommerce store, or from the product details any store publishes for Google; products from Quote Studio, product facts, and Content Kit are added for you, and you can add one by hand. Draft from scratch then builds product cards from them, Suggested products recommends the ones that fit each email with a reason, and you can ask to swap or add a product by name. The assistant never invents a product, price, photo, or product page.

Yes. New email shows every built-in template (Welcome, Promo, Newsletter, Review ask, Abandoned cart, Win-back, Product feature, Premium product, Category promo) as a finished email in your brand colors with real photos, and Photos for switches the photos to your industry (24 to choose from). Pick one, type what the email is about if you like, and press Use this template: it opens in the editor with the layout and photos in place and your words written in. Then click any photo to swap it from your Graphics Library, type over any words, or ask the AI for any change. Templates you save yourself appear first.

No. Draft from scratch rotates through eight layouts (Hero and product cards, Banner and story, Offer first, One product in the spotlight, Personal note, Numbers and proof, Alternating stories, and Reasons list) and skips the ones your last few drafts used. It names the layout it picked, and pressing Draft from scratch again gives a different one. If your request describes its own layout, it follows yours.

Yes. Exported emails are table-based with inline styles, a doctype, no scripts or forms, no editor marks, pictures on https links that work in any inbox, phone rules, and an unsubscribe link ({{unsubscribe_url}} in the exported file, Klaviyo's own tag when you use Push to Klaviyo). What you export matches the Desktop and Phone previews pixel for pixel, and the Checks card warns before Gmail's 102 KB clipping size.

From your Graphics Library, from your products' own photos (Your products: your website, Quote Studio, Content Kit), or from an https image link you have the right to use. Draft from scratch picks a library photo only when its name or tags fit the email. You can crop and position a photo for the email without changing the original, and turn 2 to 5 photos into a looping animated GIF with the animation maker. When you export, test, or push an email, its pictures load from aiKit links that work in every inbox; only the pictures in that email get such a link, and the rest of your library stays private.

A Checks card updates as you edit. Spam checks look for a missing or ALL-CAPS subject, "!!", fake "Re:" or "Fwd:" subjects, missing preview text, words spam filters watch for, link shorteners, and emails that are mostly pictures. Accessibility checks look for photos without a description, vague link words like "click here", long ALL-CAPS lines, buttons without a link, a missing heading, and colors with too little contrast. It also flags a missing mailing address, which marketing email must show by law (CAN-SPAM), and Push to Klaviyo stops until one is in your brand kit.

Yes. In an email's ⋯ menu, Save as template keeps it with a name, a client, a description, and a checklist of what changes per client (top photo, headlines, photos, products, offer code). Using the template makes a copy and asks only for those things in a Fill in for this client form. Saved templates are listed by client on the home page's Templates tab and in Start from a design.

The AI helpers do: Draft from scratch, Apply feedback, Rewrite with AI, Suggest, Subject ideas, Suggest products, Brainstorm, Plan a series, and importing a picture of an email use tokens like aiKit's other tools. Apply feedback takes any request, in any language (wording, sections, settings, photos from your library, products, links, subject line, square card pictures, a full redesign, or content from a web page you paste) in one pass and lists anything it didn't do first, with the reason. If your tokens run out, layout, links, card swaps, new buttons, and headline size still work by rule at no cost (on an uploaded HTML design, edit by clicking). Opening an HTML file, reading your website's products, templates, editing, checks, export, and test sends use none. The weekly ideas on the home page are kept for the whole week so they don't spend tokens on every visit.